advertisement
SCX-6555N Series
Multi Functional Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.
2
features of your new laser MFP
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing functions.
With the machine, you can:
SPECIAL FEATURES
Some features are optional. Please check the
specifications sections. (See "Specifications" on page 124.)
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective output. See Software section.
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 53 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to 55 ppm.
• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 50 ipm and letter-sized paper at up to 52 ipm.
Handle many different types of printable material
• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes, labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper.
• The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support plain paper in various sizes.
• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in various sizes.
Create professional documents
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. See Software section.
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. See
Software section
.
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. See Software section.
Save time and money
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper.
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
(double-sided printing). See Software section.
Expand your machine’s capacity
• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their
memory. (See "Installing a memory DIMM" on page 121.)
• A Network interface enables network printing. Your machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/100/
1000 Base TX.
• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3
Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.
.
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.
Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation.
* 136PS3 fonts
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.
Print in various environments
• You can print with various operating system such as
Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface.
Copy originals in several formats
• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided document production.
• There are special functions to erase punch holes, staple marks and newspaper background.
• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhanced at the same time.
Scan the originals and send it right away
• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using,
E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.
• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email addresses and send the scanned image immediately.
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,
TIFF and PDF formats.
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)
• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations.
• After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting.
Use USB memory devices
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various ways with your machine.
• You can scan documents and save them to the device.
• You can directly print data stored to the device.
• You can back up data and restore backup files to the machine’s memory.
IPv6
• This machine supports IPv6.
FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Basic features of this machine include;
FEATURES
USB 2.0
USB Memory
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
Hard Disk
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN
Duplex (2-sided) printing
FAX
( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)
SCX-6555N
O
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide.
Bold
Note
CONVENTION
Caution
>
Footnote
(See page 1 for more information)
DESCRIPTION
Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine.
Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature.
Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Start
EXAMPLE
.The date format may differ from country to country
Do not touch the green underside of the print cartridge.
Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order.
The example means; press Copy from the Main screen, press the Advanced tab, and then press Clone Copy.
Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.
Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information.
Copy > the Advanced tab > Clone Copy a. pages per minute
(See page1 for more information)
3
FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.
Quick Install Guide
Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.
Online User’s Guide
Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.
This user’s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.
Printer Driver Help
Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a printer driver help screen, click Help from the printer properties dialog box.
Samsung website
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsungprinter.com
.
4
safety information
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS
What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety precautions:
CAUTION
Do NOT attempt.
Do NOT disassemble.YTU
Do NOT touch.
Follow directions explicitly.
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.
Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.
Please follow them explicitly.
After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
1.
Read and understand all instructions.
2.
Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.
3.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.
4.
If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.
5.
Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp cloth for cleaning.
6.
Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.
7.
Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.
8.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.
9.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
10.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.
11.
Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.
12.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.
5
13.
Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.
14.
Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.
15.
Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.
16.
The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with
110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWG a
or bigger.
17.
Use only No.26 AWG
*
or larger telephone line cord.
18.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
19.
This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication configuration and etc.) a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
6
OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.
MERCURY SAFETY
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)
PERCHLORATE WARNING
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)
POWER SAVER
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov
RECYCLING
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.
7
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
FAX BRANDING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information:
(1) the date and time of transmission
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
8
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that they: a) promptly notify the customer.
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your machine.
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
9
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/
68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995
: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996
: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
March 9, 1999
: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4.
The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
5.
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
6.
Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7.
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson ([email protected]).
10
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4.
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
11
12
contents
2 Features of your new laser MFP
INTRODUCTION
18
20 Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
button
button
button
button
21 Understanding the Status LED
button
button
GETTING STARTED
25
Configuring network protocol via the machine
Setting the authentication password
Setting the default tray and paper
LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA
31
Media sizes supported in each mode
Guidelines for special print media
35 Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder
contents
38 Setting the paper size and type
COPYING
39
39 Understanding the Copy screen
tab
tab
tab
40 Changing the settings for each copy
Changing the size of originals
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
Selecting the type of originals
42 Using special copy features
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
SCANNING
48
48 Understanding the Scan screen
tab
tab
tab
tab
50 Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment
Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email
Entering email addresses by the address book
Entering email addresses by the keyboard
52 Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan Manager
(NetScan)
Preparation for network scanning
Scanning and sending via NetScan
53 Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/FTP server(s) at once
54 Changing the scan feature settings
13
14
contents
BASIC PRINTING
57
FAXING (OPTIONAL)
58
58 Understanding the Fax screen
tab
tab
tab
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
Receiving manually in Telephone mode
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone
Receiving in secure receiving mode
62 Adjusting the document settings
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service
Storing the originals for polling
Printing (Deleting) the polling document
contents
66 Printing a report after sending a fax
66 Sending a fax in toll save time
67 Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
67 Forwarding a received fax to other destination
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server
68 Setting up the end Fax tone
USING USB MEMORY DEVICE
69
69 Understanding the USB screen
69 Plugging in a USB memory device
70 Scanning to an USB memory device
tab
tab
tab
tab
71 Changing the scan feature settings
73 Printing from a USB memory device
73 To print a document from a USB memory device:
USING DOCUMENT BOX
74
74 Understanding the Document box screen
75 Storing documents to Document box
Storing documents from document box
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function
USING STANDARD WORKFLOW
77
77 Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen
79 Various Operations with Workform
15
16
contents
MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED SETUP
80
screen
screen
81 Browsing the machine’s status
90 Standard Workflow Management
MAINTENANCE
92
92 Monitoring the supplies life
92 Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
92 Sending the toner reorder notification
94 Maintaining the Toner cartridge
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
95 Maintaining the imaging unit
97 Managing your machine from the website
97 To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
TROUBLESHOOTING
98
98 Tips for avoiding paper jams
contents
In the optional high capacity feeder
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
106 Understanding display messages
ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
119
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
121
121 Precautions to take when installing accessories
Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties
123 Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit
SPECIFICATIONS
124
125 Facsimile specifications (optional)
GLOSSARY
126
INDEX
130
17
introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes z
•
•
•
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
•
PRINTER OVERVIEW
Front view
•
•
•
8
DADF document output tray
18 toner cartridge
9 scanner lid
19 imaging unit
10
Control panel a.The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.
Rear view
2
3
1
6
7
DADF document width guides
DADF cover
Output support
Tray 1
4
5
Optional tray a
Stand a
DADF document input tray
11
Side cover
12
Multi-purpose tray
13
Front cover
14
15
16
Multi-purpose tray extension
Multi-purpose tray paper width guides
Scanner lock switch
17
Scanner glass
18 _
Introduction
1
Extension telephone socket
(EXT) a
2
Telephone line socket
(LINE) a
7
8
USB memory port
Power switch
3
4
USB port network port
9 Power receptacle
10
Finisher output tray
(Stacker & Stapler) a
5 dummy for FDI (Foreign
Device Interface a )
11 finisher cover (Stacker &
Stapler) a
6
15-pin Finisher connection
(Stacker & Stapler) a
12 finisher (Stacker & Stapler) a.The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.
a
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Machine Setup
Job Status
Status
Display screen number keypad
Clear
Redial/Pause
On Hook Dial
9
Interrupt
10
Clear All
11
12
Power Saver
Stop
Leads you to the machine setup and advanced
settings. (See "Machine Setup" on page 80.)
Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or completed jobs.
Shows the status of your machine. (See
"Understanding the Status LED" on page 21.)
Displays the current machine status and prompts during an operation. You can set menus easily using the touch screen.
Dials fax number, and enters the number value for document copies or other options.
Deletes characters in the edit area.
In standby mode, redials the last number, or in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.
Engages the telephone line.
Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.
Reverts the current settings to the default values.
Sends the machine into the power saver mode.
(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)
Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume.
Starts a job.
13
Start
• All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
• When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else.
Introduction_ 19
INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND
USEFUL BUTTONS
Touch screen
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once you press the home icon ( ) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.
• :
This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax, Scan,
Document Box
menu directly.
•
Machine Status
: Shows the current status of the machine.
•
Admin Setting
: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.
•
Tray Management
: Shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
•
Usage Page Report
: You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Job Status button
When you press this button, the screen shows the lists of currently running jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.
• :
Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.
•
Copy
: Enters the Copy menu.
•
Fax
: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)
•
Scan
: Enters Scan to Email, NetScan, Scan to Server menu.
•
Document Box
: Enters the Document Box menu. (See "Checking
•
USB
: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.
•
Logout
: Logs out from the currently logged in account.
•
Toner Info.
: Shows amount of toner used.
•
LCD Brightness:
Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
• : To change the language that appears on the display.
• USB: guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only when you connect an USB memory module.
• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine.
• To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press the right arrow on the display screen.
Machine Setup button
When you press this button, you can browse current machine settings or
change machine values. (See "Machine Setup" on page 80.)
•
Current Job
tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.
•
Completed Job
tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.
•
Active Notice
tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.
•
No.
: Gives the order of jobs. The job in No. 001 is currently in progress.
•
Job Name
: Shows job information like name and type.
•
Status
: Gives the current status of each job.
•
User
:Provides user name, mainly computer name.
•
Job Type
: Displays details of the active job, such as job type, recipient phone number and other information.
•
Delete
: Removes the selected job from the list.
•
Delete All
: Removes all the jobs from the list.
•
Detail
: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the
Active Notice
list.
•
Close
: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.
Power Saver button
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.
(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)
If you press this button for more than two seconds, a window appears, requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is turned off. This button can also be used to turn the button on.
Off
Blue
STATUS
On
Blink
DESCRIPTION
The machine is not in the power save mode.
The machine is in the low power save mode.
The machine is in the power save mode.
20 _
Introduction
Interrupt button
When you press this button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job completes, the previous printing job continues.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.
The machine is in interrupt printing mode.
Blue On
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is shut down or reset.
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's condition by the light color of it's action.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received, or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
Green Blinking
• When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Red Blinking
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner cartridge. You can temporarily improve print
quality by redistributing the toner. (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 94.)
On • The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.
Remove the old imaging unit and install a new
one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 94.)
•
A paper jam has occurred. (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 100.)
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major
error. Check the display message. (See
"Understanding display messages" on page 106.)
Check the message on the display screen, and follow the instruction
on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part. See
"Troubleshooting" on page 98. If the problem persists, call for service.
Introduction_ 21
MENU OVERVIEW
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine
Setup , Job Status, or touching menus on the display screen. Refer to the following diagram.
Main screen
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.
Copy
Basic
Original Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex
Output
Original Type
Darkness
Paper Supply
Advanced
ID Copy
N-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Book Copy
Booklet
Covers
Transparencies
WaterMark
Overlay
Auto Crop
Image
Erase Edge
Erase Background
Margin Shift
Fax
Basic
Address
Duplex
Resolution
Advanced
Original Size
Delay Send
Priority Send
Polling
Mailbox
Image
Original Type
Darkness
Erase Background
Color Mode
Scan
Scan to Email
Basic
Advanced
tab
Image
Output
NetScan
Scan to Server
Basic
Advanced tab
Image
Output
Document Box
Public
Detail
Edit
Delete
Delete All
Secured
Detail
Edit
Delete
Delete All
USB
USB Format
USB Print
Scan to USB
Basic
tab
Advanced
tab
Image
tab
Output
tab
Machine Setup button
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life, billing, counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Machine Status
Supplies Life tab
Toner Cartridge
Imaging Unit
Fuser Kit
Feed Roller Kit
Feed Roller Kit - Bypass
Tray
Document Feeder Roller
BTR Kit
DADF Friction Pad Kit
Machine Info tab
Machine Details
Customer Support
Machine Serial
Number
IP Address
Hardware Options
Configuration
Software Versions
Tray Status
Tray
Status
Paper Size
Paper Type
Print/Report
System Report
Scan Report
Fax Report
Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Usage Counters
Total Impressions
Black Impressions
Black Copied
Impressions
Black Printed
Impressions
Sheets
Copied Sheets
Black Copied Sheets
Printed Sheets
Black Printed Sheets
2 Sided Sheets
Copied 2 Sided
Sheets
Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Black Copied 2-Sided
Sheets
Printed 2 Sided Sheets
Black Printed 2-Sided
Sheets
Analog Fax Sheets
Analog Fax 2-Sided
Sheets
Fax Image Received
Analog Fax Images
Sent
Analog Fax Images
Received
Images Sent
Network Scanning
Images Sent
Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Email Images Sent
Maintenance
Impressions
Black Maintenance
Impressions
22 _
Introduction
Admin Setting
General tab
Device Info
Date & Time
Default Settings
Measurement
Timers
Language
Power Saver
Tray Management
Altitude Adjustment
Output Option
Contention Management
Sound
Supplies Management
Machine Test
Manual Image Overwrite
HDD Spooling
Stored Job File Policy
Country
Multi-Bin
Stamp
Setup tab
Copy Setup
Fax Setup
Network Setup
Authentication
Optional Service
Document Box
Management
Standard Workflow
Management
.
Print/Report tab
Accounting Reports
Report
Usage Page Report
When the display “Are you sure you want to print it?” shows, press “Yes”.
Job Status button
.
Current Job tab
Detail
Delete
Delete All
Completed Job tab
Detail
Active Notice tab
Detail
Introduction_ 23
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS, install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/ printer) and install.
OS
Windows
CONTENTS
• Printer driver : Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer’s features.
• Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file : Use the PostScript driver to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS language.
• Scanner driver : TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel : This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing.
•
SmarThru Office a : This is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional machine.
•
Network Scan
: This program allows you to scan a document on your machine and save it to a networkconnected computer.
•
Direct Printing Utility
: This program allows you to print PDF files directly.
•
SetIP
: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/
IP addresses. IPv6 is not supported by this program.
Linux
Macintosh
• Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file : Use this file to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents.
• SANE : Use this driver to scan documents.
• Smart Panel : This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing.
•
Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file
: Use this file to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents.
•
Scanner driver
: TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine.
•
Smart Panel
: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing.
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru.
For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
• Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection
• Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers:
24 _
Introduction
Printer driver
PCL 6 POSTSCRIPT
FEATURE
Toner save
WINDOWS WINDOWS LINUX
O
O
O
O
O
O
MACINTOSH
O
O
Machine quality option
Poster printing
Multiple pages per sheet (N-up)
O
O
X
O
X X
O (2, 4) O (2, 4, 6, 9,
16)
O O Fit to page printing
O O
Scale printing
O
O
O
X
O
X Different source for first page
Watermark
Overlay
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
Duplex a
Secu Print
Scheduled Print
Spool Print
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
Proof Print
O O X
Stapler O O O a.The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps.
1.
Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
3.
Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
4.
Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit.
5.
Load paper. (See "Loading paper" on page 36.)
6.
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.
7.
Turn the machine on.
• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing quality.
• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode.
Then close the scan lid and turn the power off. And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock.
• This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See page 28 for more
information.
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 5 mm (0.02 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected.
SETTING UP THE NETWORK
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the machine's touch screen.
If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a computer and you machine. Then, refer to Software section.
Supported operating systems
The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine:
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Network interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX
Network operating system
• Novell NetWare 5.x, 6.x
• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/Server
2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network protocols
Dynamic addressing server
• TCP/IP
• EtherTalk
DHCP, BOOTP
2.
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
Getting Started_ 25
If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to set up a
DHCP network protocol, go to http://developer.apple.com/networking/ bonjour/download/ , select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating system and install the program. This program will allow you to set network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the installation window. This program does not support
Linux.
Configuring network protocol via the machine
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.
1.
Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45
Ethernet cable.
2.
Make sure you have turned on the machine.
3.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
4.
Press Admin Setting.
5.
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password input area, then the question marks appears. Use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once the password is entered, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)
6.
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
7.
Select TCP/IP Protocol.
• Apple Talk Protocol: This protocol is widely used in Macintosh network environments.
• Ethernet Speed: You can select the communication speed for
Ethernet connections.
8.
Press IP Setting.
9.
Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses by number keypad on the control panel.
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.
10.
Press OK.
You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs.
•
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
: Web-based printer management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™
Web Admin Service
provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download this program from http:// solution.samsungprinter.com
.
•
SyncThru™ Web Service
: Web server embedded on your network print server, which allows you to:
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments.
- Customize machine settings.
- Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning to email.
- Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning to the FTP or SMB servers.
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings
•
SetIP
: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP
protocol. See "Using the SetIP program" on page 30.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements:
Windows
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
OS
CPU RAM
64 MB
(128 MB)
128 MB
(256 MB)
128 MB
(512 MB)
FREE HDD
SPACE
600 MB Windows 2000 Pentium II 400 MHz
(Pentium III 933 MHz)
Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
Windows
Server 2003
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
Windows
Windows
Server 2008
Windows 7
Windows
Server 2008
R2
1.5 GB
1.25 GB to
2 GB
Pentium IV 3 GHz
Pentium IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(1024 MB)
512 MB
(2048 MB)
15 GB
10 GB
Pentium IV 1 GHz 32bit or 64-bit processor or higher
1 GB
(2 GB)
16 GB
• Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory(to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Pentium IV 1
GHz(x86) or
1.4GHz(x64) processors(2GHz or faster)
512 MB
(2048 MB)
10 GB
26 _
Getting Started
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
• Users who have an administrator right can install the software.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.
Macintosh
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
OPERATIN
G SYSTEM
Mac OS X
10.4 or lower
Mac OS X
10.5
Mac OS X
10.6
•
•
CUP
PowerPC G4/
G5
Intel processors
• 867 MHz or faster
PowerPC G4/
G5
• Intel processors
• Intel processors
RAM
FREE HDD
SPACE
1 GB • 128 MB for a
PowerPC based
MAC (512 MB)
• 512 MB for an
Intel based MAC
(1 GB)
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
Linux
ITEM
Operating system
CPU
RAM free HDD space
Connection
Software
REQUIREMENTS
Red Hat 8 ~ 9
Fedora Core 1 ~ 4
Mandrake 9.2 ~ 10.1
SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2
Pentium IV 1 GHz or higher
256 MB or higher
1 GB or higher
USB interface or Network interface
Linux Kernel 2.4 or higher
Glibc 2.2 or higher
CUPS
SANE
• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images.
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum.
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable, refer to Software section.
• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system. The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the printer feature, or the interface in use. (See Software section.)
1.
Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. (See
"Setting up the network" on page 25.) All applications should be closed
on your computer before beginning installation.
2.
Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows , Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click
Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows , Windows 7 and Windows
Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control window.
3.
Click Next.
• The window above may slightly differ, if you are reinstalling the driver.
4.
Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.
Getting Started_ 27
5.
The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.
• If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.
To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the machine.
To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page. (See "Printing a report" on page 90.)
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer
[UNC]
and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network
administrator or print network information. (See "Printing a report" on page 90.)
6.
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
• If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.
• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a different Windows location, you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete.
MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print.
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine.
0
1 Normal
2 High 1
3 High 2
4 High 3
1.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine.
2.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
3.
Click Settings > Machine Settings > System > Setup > Altitude Adj.
4.
Select the appropriate altitude value.
5.
Click Apply.
Setting the authentication password
To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To change password, follow the next steps.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password input area, then the question marks appears, use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)
4.
Press the Setup tab > Authentication.
5.
Press Change Admin. Password.
6.
Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.
7.
Press OK.
28 _
Getting Started
Setting the date and time
When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print, also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to change it for correct time being.
If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date & Time.
5.
Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and use the numeric keypad on the control panel.
6.
Press OK.
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and Time
Format .
Changing the display language
To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following steps.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab.
5.
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.
6.
Select the desired language.
7.
Press OK.
Setting job timeout
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab.
5.
Press Timers.
6.
Select System Timeout.
• You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour.
7.
Select On.
8.
Select a duration using left/right arrows.
9.
Press OK.
Using energy saving feature
The machine provides energy saving features.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab.
5.
Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.
6.
Select appropriate option and time.
•
Scan Power Save
: Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.
• Low Power Save : Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under
100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit.
• Power Save : Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after certain time.
7.
Press OK.
Setting the default tray and paper
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job. (See "General settings" on page 81.)
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab.
5.
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray
Management .
6.
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7.
Press OK.
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen is grayed out.
Changing the default settings
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at once.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.
5.
Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.
Getting Started_ 29
For example, if you want to change the default setting of the brightness
& darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and adjust the brightness & darkness.
6.
Press OK.
Using the SetIP program
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.
Especially, it helps the network administrator set several network IPs at the same time.
The following procedure is based on windows XP. If you use Macintosh or
Linux OS, see Software section
• You can only use SetIP program when your machine is connected to a network.
• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system. If you are using Macintosh or Linux, See Software section.
• If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to setup a DHCP network protocol, go to the http:// developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/ , select the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system, and install the program. This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically. Follow the instruction in the installation window. This Bonjour program does not support Linux
• You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
Installing the program
1.
Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver
CD runs automatically, close the window.
2.
Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents the name of your CD-ROM drive.)
3.
Double-click Application > SetIP.
4.
Open the folder of the language you plan to use.
5.
Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
6.
Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.
Setting network values
1.
Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s
MAC address. (See "Printing a report" on page 90.)
2.
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Network Printer Utilities > SetIP.
3.
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
4.
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).
5.
Click OK, and then the machine prints the network information. Check all the settings are correct.
6.
Click Exit.
UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters.
1
2
3
5
6
Left/Right
Backspace
Delete
4
Clear
Input area
Shift
7
Symbols
8
Space
9
OK
10
Cancel
Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.
Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.
Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor.
Deletes all characters in the input area.
Enters letters within this line.
Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa.
Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the symbol keyboard.
Enters a blank between characters.
Saves and closes input result.
Cancels and closes input result.
If you enter the email address, then the keyboard for email pops up.
After you enter the address, press OK to activate entered address.
Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From, To, Cc,
Bcc , Subject, Message in order.
30 _
Getting Started
loading originals and print media
This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
Setting the paper size and type
LOADING ORIGINALS
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the
DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.
1.
Lift and open the scanner lid.
2.
Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3.
Close the scanner lid.
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.
Always keep it clean. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 93.)
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the lid open.
In the DADF
Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of paper (75 g/m 2 one job.
, 20 lb) for
When you use the DADF:
• Do not load paper smaller than 174 x 128 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than 218 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- coated paper
- onion skin or thin paper
- wrinkled or creased paper
- curled or rolled paper
- torn paper
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading.
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having other unusual characteristics.
To load an original into the DADF:
1.
Load the original face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray.
Loading originals and print media_ 31
2.
Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always keep it clean.
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
• Poor print quality
• Increased paper jams
• Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section.
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project.
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images.
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper.
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no control.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.
32 _
Loading originals and print media
Specification on print media
TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT A CAPACITY B
Plain paper
Envelope
Letter
Legal
Folio
A4
Oficio
JIS B5
ISO B5
Executive
A5
Statement
A6
Envelope B5
Envelope Monarch
Envelope No. 10
Envelope DL
Envelope C5
Envelope C6
Letter, A4, Oficio
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches)
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)
Refer to the Plain paper section
•
•
•
60 to 90 g/m
75 to 90 g/m bond)
2
2 (16 to 24 lb bond) for the tray
60 to 220 g/m tray
2 (16 to 58 lb bond) for the multi-purpose
60 to 120 g/m 2 (16 to 32 lb bond) for the high capacity feeder
(20 to 24 lb
•
•
520 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) paper for the tray
100 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) in the multi-purpose tray
• 2,100 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) in the high capacity feeder c
• 50 sheets of 75 g/m
• paper for the tray
10 sheets of 75 g/m
2
2 (20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray
(20 lb)
Transparency 138 to 146 g/m 2 (37 to 39 lb) • 100 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) paper for the tray
• 20 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray
Labels Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, Oficio, A6
Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m bond)
2 (32 to 40 lb • 100 sheets of 75 g/m 2 paper for the tray
(20 lb)
• 10 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray
Card stock
Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, Oficio, A6,
Post Card 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 220 g/m bond)
2 (24 to 58 lb
Minimum size (custom) 98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches) 60 to 220 g/m 2 (16 to 58 lb bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) a.If media weight is over 105 g/m 2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
c. High capacity feeder is not supported A6.
• 50 sheets of 75 g/m paper for the tray
2 (20 lb)
• 10 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray
Loading originals and print media_ 33
Media sizes supported in each mode
MODE
Copy mode
SIZE
Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, Folio,
Executive, JIS B5, A5,
A6
SOURCE
• tray 1
• optional tray 2
• multi-purpose tray
• high capacity feeder
Single side printing
Duplex printing a
All sizes supported by the machine
• tray 1
• optional tray
• multi-purpose tray
• high capacity feeder
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
• tray 1
• optional tray
• multi-purpose tray
• high capacity feeder
Fax mode b
Letter, A4, Legal • tray 1
• optional tray
• high capacity feeder a.75 to 90 g/m 2 (20 ~ 24 lb) only b.Only the optional fax kit is installed.
Guidelines for special print media
MEDIA TYPE
Envelopes
GUIDELINES
• Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m 2 or jamming may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air.
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation.
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds.
• Do not use stamped envelopes.
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature, see
page see "General specifications" on page 124. The
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
34 _
Loading originals and print media
MEDIA TYPE
Card stock or custom-sized materials
GUIDELINES
Transparencies • To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers.
• Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand 180 °C, the machine’s fusing temperature.
• Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
• To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight.
• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
Labels
• To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines.
- When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
• Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
• Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or
356 mm long.
• In the software application, set margins at least
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.
MEDIA TYPE
Preprinted paper
GUIDELINES
• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature, see
• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers.
• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage.
• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE
PAPER TRAY
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.
1 paper length guide
2 paper width guide
If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to Quick
Install Sheet to adjust paper size.
1.
Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load another size, hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding position.
Loading originals and print media_ 35
2.
After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.
1.
To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the side you want to print facing down.
When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the tray.
3.
Load the paper into the tray.
4.
Place the tray into the machine.
5.
Set the paper size from your computer.
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.
1 Full
2 Empty
Place the side to be printed facing up.
ENVELOPE
PREPRINTED
PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK
LETTERHEAD
PAPER
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 75 g/m 2 paper.
(20 lb bond) plain
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to
load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (See "Supplies" on page 119.)
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s warranty or service agreement.
LABEL
2.
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 38 for copying and faxing or
Software section for PC-printing.
• If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
• You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
36 _
Loading originals and print media
In the multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print media.
• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and
print quality problems. (See "Selecting print media" on page 32.)
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the multi-purpose tray.
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:
1.
Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray extension, as shown.
3.
Load the paper.
Place the side to be printed facing down.
ENVELOPE
PREPRINTED
PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
2.
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading.
PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK
LETTERHEAD
PAPER
LABEL
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.
Loading originals and print media_ 37
4.
Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following loading guidelines:
• Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side.
• Transparencies: Print side up and the top with the adhesive strip entering the machine first.
• Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine first.
• Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the machine.
• Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the machine first.
• Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with an uncurled edge toward the machine.
5.
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose
tray. See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 38 for copying
and faxing or the Software section for PC-printing.
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the control panel.
6.
After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the multi-purpose tray.
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab.
5.
Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray Management.
6.
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7.
Press OK.
38 _
Loading originals and print media
copying
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine.
This chapter includes
•
•
•
Changing the settings for each copy
•
Advanced tab UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lost of copying options. All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily.
If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
Basic tab
• Original Size
: Selects the size of the originals. (See "Changing the size of originals" on page 40.)
•
Reduce/Enlarge
: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
(See "Reducing or enlarging copies" on page 41.)
•
Duplex
: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.
(See "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 41.)
• Output : Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option appears.
(See "Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)" on page 42.)
•
Original Type
: Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job. (See "Selecting the type of originals" on page 42.)
•
Light
, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark
images. (See "Changing the darkness" on page 42.)
•
Paper Supply
: Selects the paper supply tray.
•
Saving to box
: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box
chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 74.)
• Job Build : Allows you to copy several pages or different types of
originals into a single copy. (See "Merging multiple jobs as a single copy" on page 42.).
• ID Copy : Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.
(See "ID card copying" on page 43.)
• N-Up : Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper. (See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy option" on page 43.)
• Poster Copy
: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages. (See
• Clone Copy : Prints multiple image copies from the original
document on a single page. (See "Clone copying" on page 44.)
• Book Copy
: Allows you to copy an entire book. (See "Book copying" on page 45.)
• Booklet : Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or
2-sided originals. (See "Booklet copying" on page 45.)
• Covers : Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock
taken from a different tray. (See "Cover copying" on page 45.)
• Transparencies : Adds a blank or printed divider between
transparencies within a set. (See "Transparency copying" on page 45.)
• WaterMark
: Prints an image with the added watermark. (See
"Watermark copying" on page 46.)
• Overlay : Prints an image with the image previously stored in your
machine. (See "Overlay copying" on page 47.)
• Auto Crop : Prints only the image of an original after cropping the
blank parts like the margin. (See "Auto crop copying" on page 47.)
Copying_ 39
Image tab
4.
Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.
•
Erase Edge
: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (See "Erasing edges" on page 46.)
•
Erase Background
: Prints an image with no background. (See
"Erasing background images" on page 46.)
•
Margin Shift
: Creates a binding edge for the document. (See
"Shifting margins" on page 46.)
COPYING ORIGINALS
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.
1.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
2.
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down.
5.
Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than two copies, the message Another Page? appears after the first page copied. At this time, if you select No, the machine starts copying the rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order. Because the default value of theOutput option is Collated.
6.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel. Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete.
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features before starting to copy.
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen.
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting. (See
"General settings" on page 81.)
Changing the size of originals
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the original size.
Press more to see the detail values.
3.
Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/
Enlarge
, Duplex and more. (See "Changing the size of originals" on
page 40., see "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 41.)
• Custom : Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size.
•
Auto
: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.
40 _
Copying
•
Mixed Size (Letter & Legal)
: Allows for the use of both of Letter and
Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3 pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order from several trays.
• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used values.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper.
Press more to see the values.
•
Original(100%)
: Prints texts or images the same size as originals.
•
Auto Fit
: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the output paper.
• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used values.
The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex value.
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original.
Press more to see the detail values.
•
1 -> 1 Sided
: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from originals.
• 1 -> 2 Sided : Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper.
•
1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2
: Scans one side of the originals and prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180°.
•
2 -> 1 Sided
: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate sheet.
•
2 -> 2 Sided
: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals.
•
2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2
: Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180°.
•
Reverse 1 ->2 Sided
: Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper.
• Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2 : Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper. The information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180°.
Copying_ 41
•
Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided
: Scans the both sides of originals and prints them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on the back side of a paper.
Selecting the type of originals
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated or Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original.
Press more to see the values.
• Collated : Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
• Text : Use for originals containing mostly text.
• Text/Photo : Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
• Photo : Use when originals are photographs.
Changing the darkness
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the level of light/dark in the printouts.
• Uncollated : Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
•
Staple, Portrait
: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-oriented output.
•
Staple, Landscape
: Adds a single staple to all of your landscapeoriented output.
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can select specific copy features.
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy. For example, if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a copy job, you can use this feature. In the picture below, each number means each segment order.
䓄
䓆
䓅
䓇
① Segment 1 from the DADF.
② Segment 2 from the scanner glass.
③ Segment 3 from the DADF.
④ Segment 4 from the scanner glass.
⑤ Segment 5 from the DADF.
䓈
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.
1.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
2.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
3.
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
4.
Press On to enable job build function.
The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker & stapler. (See
"Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)" on page 119.)
42 _
Copying
•
Off
: Disables Job Build feature.
•
On
: Enables Job Build feature.
•
Display Between Segments
: After executing a segment, the job is paused with this screen. is displayed Then the user can select to keep copying or stop.
•
: Prints the sample page(s) of a segment to confirm the contents.
•
Delete
: Deletes a segment.
•
Delete All
: Deletes all segments.
•
Print All
: Prints all segments.
•
Add Segment
: Adds a new segment.
•
Cancel
: Removes all segments in the list, and cancels the job.
5.
Press Add Segment.
6.
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down.
7.
Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning.
8.
Repeat step 5 to step 7.
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add segments without any restriction.
9.
After adding segments, press Print All.
ID card copying
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass.
6.
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed.
• If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1
Sided , the Output option to Collated.
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying position of the page, follow the next steps.
Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.
1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2 Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3 Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Mamual ID Copy Setup.
4 Press the number from the template list table.
5 Press Edit Template.
6 Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.
• Template Name: Enter the template name.
• Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select the largest scanning position out of the originals.
LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-090mm
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
1.
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.
5.
Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.
• Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page. (select number 4.)
• Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are on. If you choose to copy four images, you have to select four positions here.
• First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm
Copying_ 43
• Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm
• Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm
• Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm
Poster copying
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass.
7 Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the template list table.
8 Press and select Copy.
9 Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Mamual ID Copy Setup.
10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.
11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper.
2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF.
1 2
3 4
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.
5.
Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.
•
Off
: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.
•
2Up
: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
•
4Up
: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
6.
Press Start on the control panel.
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the N-
Up
feature.
1.
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are selected as below;
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
- Paper Supply to Tray.
5.
Press On to activate this feature.
6.
Press OK.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order:
Clone copying
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass.
1.
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
44 _
Copying
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are selected as below;
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
- Paper Supply to Tray.
5.
Press On to activate this feature.
6.
Press OK.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Book copying
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm(1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass.
1.
Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab > Erase
Edge > Book Center and Edges Erase.
3.
Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.
4.
Select the binding option.
• Off : Disables this feature.
• Left Page : Prints left page of the book.
• Right Page : Prints right page of the book.
• Both Page : Prints both facing pages of the book.
5.
Press OK.
6.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Booklet copying
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence.
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.
5.
Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each option.
• 1 Sided Original : Copies on one side of the paper.
• 2 Sided Original : Copies on both sides of the paper.
6.
Press OK.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS
B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.
Cover copying
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Covers.
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you cannot use this feature.
5.
Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each option.
• Position : Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front, back, or both.
• Cover Sheet : Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or blank paper.
• Paper Source : Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is loaded.
6.
Press OK.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Transparency copying
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy the information.
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types and
Paper Size to Transparency.(See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 38.)
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.
3.
Set the paper type to Transparency.
4.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
5.
Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.
6.
Select Transparencies option.
• No Separator : Does not place separator sheets between transparencies.
• Blank Sheet : Places a blank sheet between transparencies.
• Printed Sheet : Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency.
7.
Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or
Printed Sheet .
Copying_ 45
8.
Press OK.
9.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Erasing edges
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.
Shifting margins
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.
1.
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.
4.
Select the appropriate option.
•
Off
: Disables this feature.
•
Border Erase
: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.
•
Small Original Erase
: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
•
Hole Punch Erase
: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies.
•
Book Center and Edges Erase
: Erases shadows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This feature
only applies when you do copying a book. (See "Book copying" on page 45.)
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use Book
Center and Edges Erase .
5.
Press OK.
6.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Erasing background images
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the background, as in newspapers or catalogs.
1.
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Press the Image tab > Erase Background.
4.
Select the appropriate option.
• Off : Disables this feature.
• Auto : Optimizes the background.
• Enhance : The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.
• Erase : The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
5.
Press OK.
6.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Press the Image tab > Margin Shift
4.
Select Margin Shift option.
• Off : Disables this feature.
• Auto Center : Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically. The original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.
• Custom Margin : Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the scanner glass or in DADF.
5.
Press OK.
6.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Watermark copying
You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or
Confidential
printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the copy.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals and print media" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.
5.
Select WaterMark option.
• Off : Disables this feature.
•
Top Secret
: Prints the original with Top Secret text.
•
Confidential
: Prints the original with Confidential text.
• Urgent : Prints the original with Urgent text.
• Draft : Prints the original with Draft text.
• Custom : The machine prints the original with the customized text.
6.
Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.
7.
Press OK.
8.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
46 _
Copying
Overlay copying
If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the original with the previously stored data.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals and print media" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.
5.
Press List.
6.
Select a file name.
7.
Select a overlay option.
•
New
: Makes the new overlay. When the file name pops up, enter the file name.
• Detail : Shows information of the selected overlay.
•
Edit
: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected overlay.
•
Apply
: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.
•
: Prints the selected overlay.
•
Cancel
: Cancels overlay options you have selected.
8.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing the new overlay by pressing the Start button.
Auto crop copying
The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin.
Multi-Bin
You can choose the output mode for printouts.
You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.
1.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
2.
Press the Advanced tab > Multi-Bin.
3.
Select the appropriate option.
• Mailbox : Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set. If you set the mailbox to Bin3, printouts will be stacked in Bin3.
• Job Separator : Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order in each bin. However, if there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin has priority, which means prinouts will be stacked there first.
• Collator : Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of originals in each bin.
• Stacker : Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-one. When Bin1 is full, printouts will be stacked in Bin2.
4.
Press OK.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals and print media" on page 31.)
2.
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.
5.
Press On to activate this feature.
6.
Press OK.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Copying_ 47
scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. Then you can fax or email the files, upload them to your website, or use them to create projects that you can print.
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.
This chapter includes
•
•
•
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced resolution.
•
Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan Manager
•
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
•
Changing the scan feature settings
UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN
To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
SCANNING BASICS
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital files.
There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to directly connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using the network scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination via the network.
• Network Scan:
Sends the document to your networked computer via the Network Scan program. You can scan an image from the machine if it is connected to the network and send it to the computer where
Network Scan
is running.
• TWAIN:
TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the scanning process. See Software section. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection. See Software section.
• Samsung SmarThru Office:
This feature is the accompanying software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection. See Software section.
• WIA:
WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB cable. See Software section.
• Email:
You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.
(See "Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on page 50.)
• FTP:
You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See
"Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on page 53.)
• SMB:
You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB
server. (See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service
.(See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
Press Scan to Email, NetScan or Scan to Server.
• Scan to Email : Scans and sends the scanned output to the
• NetScan : Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination
•
Scan to Server
: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
48 _
Scanning
Basic tab
This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server, and NetScan's basic screen.
Scan to Email
Scan to Server
•
From
: Sender's email address.
•
To
/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an additional recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be displayed.
•
Subject
/Message: Subject and message of the email.
•
Remove All
: Erases everything in the input area.
•
Address
: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from your
computer using the SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Storing email addresses" on page 51.)
•
Duplex
: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
•
Resolution
: Selects the scanning resolution value.
•
Saving to box
: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box
chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 74.)
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes up and closes
Scan to Email
.
NetScan
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name and password to enter the NetScan screen.
•
SMB
: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.
• FTP : Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.
• No.
: Index number which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.
(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
• Server : Alias name which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.
(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
• Duplex : Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
• Resolution : Selects the scanning resolution value.
•
Saving to box
: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box
chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 74.)
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
Advanced tab
• Job Build : Allows you to scan several originals, and then send them
See "Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/FTP server(s) at once" on page 53.)
• Original Size
: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See
• Back : Returns to the previous screen.
•
No.
: Lists the number in order for application programs.
•
Application
: Shows the available application programs from your computer.
•
Select
: Moves to the application program you have selected.
Scanning_ 49
Image tab SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING
THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email.
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper.
• Original Type
: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See
•
Color Mode
: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(See "Color Mode" on page 55.)
•
Darkness
: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 55.)
• Erase Background
: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See
"Erase Background" on page 55.)
• Scan to Edge
: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
Output tab
2.
Press Scan from the Main screen.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and
Password. This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service
. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
3.
Press Scan to Email.
4.
Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
5.
Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.
•
Quality
: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See
•
File Format
: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
•
Scan Preset
: Automatically changes some scan options such as file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 56.)
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
•
From
: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses
easily. (See "Global" on page 52.)
•
To
/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the
LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (See "Global" on page 52.)
•
Subject
: Title of email.
•
Message
: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email.
The maximum size is 1KB.
To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.
50 _
Scanning
6.
Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.
• Duplex : Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side only, or on both sides.
• Resolution : Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right arrows.
7.
Press the Start button to scan and send the file.
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy job either sending a fax.
Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email
You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file. And, therefore, you can send the document with a single email.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users.
1.
Press Scan from the Main screen.
2.
Press Scan to Email.
3.
Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
5.
Press On to enable the job build function.
•
Off
: Disables Job Build feature.
•
On
: Enables Job Build feature.
•
Display Between Segments
: After executing a segment, the job is paused with this screen is displayed. Then the user can select to keep sending email or stop.
•
Delete
: Deletes a segment.
•
Delete All
: Deletes all segments.
•
Send All
: Prints all segments.
•
Add Segment
: Adds a new segment.
•
Cancel
: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
6.
Press Add Segment.
7.
Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper.
8.
Press Start to start the scanning job.
9.
Repeat step 6 to step 8.
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add segments without any restriction.
10.
After adding segments, press Send All.
Setting up an email account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1.
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2.
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3.
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. ( See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
5.
Click Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
6.
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
7.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 25.
8.
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication.
9.
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
10.
Click Apply.
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP
Authentication
.
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port number is 25.
If SMTP server requires SSL/TLS connection, enable Secure E-mail
Connection with SSL/TLS
Storing email addresses
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's memory and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine's memory, and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain (LDAP) server.
Through the SyncThru™ Web Service, you can easily enter and store email addresses from your computer.
Individual
1.
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2.
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3.
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4.
Click Address Book.
5.
Click Add.
6.
When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Speed No. from 1 to 500, enter User Name and E-mail Address.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Local > the Individual tab.
Group
1.
Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.
2.
Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.
3.
Click Address Book > E-mail Groups.
4.
Click Add Group.
5.
Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6.
Add Individual addresses to the e-mail group.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Group.
Scanning_ 51
Global
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are processed by the LDAP server.
1.
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2.
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3.
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4.
5.
Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6.
Enter LDAP server and Port.
7.
Enter optional information.
8.
Click Apply.
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data.
The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the operating systems.
Entering email addresses by the address book
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book, you can simply enter email addresses.
1.
Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.
Entering email addresses by the keyboard
When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field, the keyboard shows on the display screen.
The following explanation is the example that you are entering
1.
Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.
The search window shows.
2.
Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or press Search to specify the search criteria.
When the search is completed, the screen displays the search results.
3.
Press From and enter your email address and press OK.
4.
Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press To,
Cc
or Bcc in the left-hand pane.
5.
Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.
6.
Press OK.
2.
Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.
3.
Press @.
4.
Press a, b, c.
5.
Press . and press c, o, m.
to enter contents in other fields, press keyboard.
6.
Press OK after finishing all the contents.
on the
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA
SAMSUNG NETWORK SCAN MANAGER
(NETSCAN)
You can scan an image on the machine via the Network Scan program which is installed in your networked computer.
Preparation for network scanning
Make sure the printer software is installed on your computer using the
Printer Software CD-ROM, since the printer software and should include the
Network Scan
program. See "Fax option kit" on page 119 for detailed
information on installation steps.
1.
In Windows, select Start > Programs > Samsung Network Printer
Utilities
> Network Scan > Network Scan.
The Samsung Network Scan Manager window opens.
2.
Click the Add Device button.
3.
Click Next.
4.
Select Connect to this scanner and enter the IP address of your machine.
Or select Browse for a scanner. (recommended) to show a list of scanners on your network.
5.
Click Next.
6.
Select your machine from the list and enter a name, user ID, and PIN
(Personal Identification Number) for the machine.
• The model name of your machine is automatically entered as the scanner name, but it can be changed upon your need.
• The ID can be entered up to 8 characters. The first character must be a letter.
• The PIN must be of 4 digits.
52 _
Scanning
7.
Click Next.
8.
Click Finish.
Your machine is added to the scanner list of the Network Scan program and you can now scan images through the network.
You can change the scanner properties of your machine and the scan settings from the Samsung Network Scan Manager window. Click
Properties
and set the options in each tab.
The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access. You can enable the secured scan feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service
as an administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.) And click Setting > Machine Settings > Scan
> Scan Security > PC Scan Security.
Scanning and sending via NetScan
1.
Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a network and Samsung Network Scan Manager is running on the computer.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass.
3.
Press Scan from the Main screen.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and
Password. This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service .
4.
Press NetScan.
5.
When the authentication message pops up, enter ID and Password. ID and Password that are which you have entered during the configuration
When login is completed, the screen shows the NetScan server address which is the networked computer. Additionally, this shows Application list that is configured in Samsung Network Scan Manager.
6.
Select one from the application list and press Select.
7.
Press Start on the control panel to start scanning.
8.
The original will be scanned and sent to your computer.
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB/
FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)
You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP.
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file.
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru™ Web
Service , and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB. Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server.
1.
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2.
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3.
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4.
Click Address Book.
5.
Click Add.
6.
Enter a name and speed number.
7.
Check Add SMB.
8.
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
9.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port number is 139.
10.
If you want to allow the unauthorized person’s access to SMB server, check Anonymous. By default, this is unchecked.
11.
Enter the login name and password.
12.
Enter the domain name of the SMB server.
13.
Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the scanned images.
14.
Configure Scan folder creating policy, Filing Policy and File Name.
15.
Click Apply.
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
1.
Press Scan from the Main screen.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and Password.
This message shows only when the network administrator has set the
authentication in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
2.
Press Scan to Server.
3.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass.
4.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
5.
Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.
6.
Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the
SyncThru™ Web Service
.
7.
Select the destination SMB server.
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP servers.
8.
Press Start on the control panel.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server.
Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/
FTP server(s) at once
You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file. And, therefore, you can send the document with a single access to the server.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users.
1.
Press Scan from the Main screen.
2.
Press Scan to Server.
3.
Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
Scanning_ 53
5.
Press On to enable job build function.
• Off : Disables Job Build feature.
• On : Enables Job Build feature.
• Display Between Segments : After executing a segment, the job is paused with this screen is displayed. Then the user can select to keep sending email or stop.
• Delete : Deletes a segment.
• Delete All : Deletes all segments.
• Send All : Prints all segments.
• Add Segment : Adds a new segment.
• Cancel : Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
6.
Press Add Segment.
7.
Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper.
8.
Press Start to start the scanning job.
9.
Repeat step 6 to step 8.
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add segments without any restriction.
10.
After adding segments, press Send All.
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job, such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after that period, the options will be reset to default values.
Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >
Duplex
. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.
• 1 Sided : For originals that are printed on one side only.
•
2 Sided
: For originals that are printed on both sides.
• 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2 : For originals that are printed on both sides.
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >
Resolution
. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.
100, 200, 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to
Color or Gray. The following table shows detailed information feature, resolution and file format options.
FEATURE
Scan to Email
NetScan
Scan to Server
RESOLUTION (DPI)
100, 200, 300, 400,
600
100, 200, 300, 400,
600
100, 200, 300, 400,
600
FILE FORMAT
PDF, Single-Page TIFF,
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG
PDF, TIFF, JPEG
PDF, Single-Page TIFF,
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG
Original Size
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the predefined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option to
Auto , the machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab >
Original Size
. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
54 _
Scanning
Original Type
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Original Type
. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output darker.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Darkness
. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press
OK
.
•
Text
: For originals that have text or line art.
•
Text/Photo
: For originals that have both text and photographs together.
•
Photo
: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Color Mode
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Color
Mode
. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•
Color
: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
• Gray : Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Erase
Background . Select the appropriate option and press OK.
• Off : Disables this feature.
• Auto : Optimizes the background.
• Enhance : The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.
• Erase : The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Scan to Edge
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Scan to Edge . Select On and press OK.
Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality you select a larger file size you get.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >
Quality .
•
Mono
: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode.
Scanning_ 55
File Format
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File
Format
.
•
: Scans originals in PDF format.
You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification. To add the Digital Signature, you have to create the certification from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service
> Scan Security > Digital Signature in PDF.The Digital Signature can be used in the Scan to Server feature.
You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access. You can set the encryption level, password, and access permission such as reading, printing, or modifying, etc. The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to
Server
feature. (See "PDF Encryption" on page 56.)
•
Single-Page TIFF
: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
•
Multi-Page TIFF
: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.
•
JPEG
: Scans original in JPEG format.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode.
PDF Encryption
To encrypt your PDF files, you need to set up parameters for the encryption level, password, and access permission, etc.
The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server feature.
1.
Press Scan > Scan to Server > the Output tab > File Format > PDF.
2.
Press PDF Encryption.
3.
Press On.
5.
Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF.
6.
Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the
Access Permission
menu below.
7.
Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying. This configuration will affect the users accessed with the User Password.
8.
Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to extract text or graphics.
9.
Press OK.
Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > Scan
Preset
.
•
Sharing and Printing
: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality documents.
•
High Quality Printing
: Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size.
•
Archival Record
: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output.
•
OCR
: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect the highest quality images.
•
Simple Scan
: Used for a simple document with text only. The file size of output is small.
• Custom : Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.
4.
Select an encryption level.
• Low (RC4, 40 bits) : Recommended for Acrobat 3.0 or later version.
• High (RC4, 128 bits) : Recommended for Acrobat 5.0 or later version.
• High (AES, 128 bits) : Recommended for Acrobat 7.0 or later version.
56 _
Scanning
basic printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
•
PRINTING A DOCUMENT
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use.
For details about printing, see Software section.
CANCELING A PRINT JOB
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:
1.
Click the Windows Start menu.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound
> Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers .
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers .
3.
For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, 2008 and Vista, double-click your machine.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus > See what’ s printing.
4.
From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.
•
Basic printing_ 57
faxing (optional)
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Adjusting the document settings
•
• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more information ask the internet service provider.
• You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission, slower fax transmmission, poor fax quality and communication failures when faxing over VoIP network. Contact you local network administrator or
Internet Service Provider for more details.
• To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on the
control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup. (See "Fax
• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet
Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.
•
•
•
Printing a report after sending a fax
•
Sending a fax in toll save time
•
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
•
Forwarding a received fax to other destination
UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the Main screen.
Basic tab
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem/Telephone line
PREPARING TO FAX
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.
The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to another.
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option lists
(See "Fax option kit" on page 119.) and contact the purchasing point
to order. When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit.
After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature. (See
"Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit" on page 123.)
•
Fax number input area
: Shows the recipient's fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone
book, press Individual or Group. (See "Setting up a fax phonebook" on page 63.)
•
Add No.
: Lets you add more destinations.
• : Deletes the last digit entered.
• : Removes all digits of the selected entry.
• Remove : Removes the selected fax number entry.
• Remove All : Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.
• Address : Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from
• Duplex : Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the original, both sides of the original.
58 _
Faxing (Optional)
•
Resolution
: Adjusts the resolution options.
•
Saving to box
: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box
chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 74.)
Advanced tab
SENDING A FAX
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of transmission.
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or the
scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 31.) If the originals
are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in scanning.
Setting the fax header
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.
4.
Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.
5.
Press OK.
Sending a fax
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
• Job Build : Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax
transmission. (See "Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission" on page 61.).
• Original Size : Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to update current setting.
• Delay Send : Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without
your intervention. (See "Delaying a fax transmission" on page 60.)
• Priority Send : Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.
(See "Sending a priority fax" on page 61.)
• Polling : Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the
machine. (See "Using the polling option" on page 64.)
• Mailbox : Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.
(See "Using Mailbox" on page 65.)
• Back : Returns to the Basic tab.
Image tab
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4.
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2
Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.
5.
When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on the right side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.
• Original Type : Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned. (See "Original Type" on page 62.)
• Darkness
: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax. (See
• Erase Background : Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns
as in newspaper originals. (See "Erase Background" on page 63.)
• Color Mode : Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or
color. (See "Color Mode" on page 63.)
• Back : Returns to the Basic tab.
6.
To add a number, press Add No..
7.
Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.
Faxing (Optional)_ 59
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the machine start transmission. Or press the Job Status button, and select the job you want to delete, press Delete.
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to place another page.
• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at
the same time. (See "Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on page 50.)
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up into the DADF.
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4.
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
5.
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.
6.
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
• If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a fax number.
7.
Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine.
Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually. (See
Automatic resending
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the machine automatically redials the number.
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial attempts, refer to the next following steps.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press Redial.
5.
Select Redial Term and Redial Times.
6.
Press OK.
Redialing the last number
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
3.
Place the originals face up into the DADF.
4.
Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers.
5.
Select a fax number in the list and press OK.
The machine automatically begins to send.
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present.
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.
5.
Press On.
6.
Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start Time with left/right arrows.
• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name as
'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.
Start Time
is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You can set
Start Time
on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the time starting from
1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning message will appear and the machine resets it to the current time.
7.
Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.
60 _
Faxing (Optional)
Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.
5.
Press On.
6.
Press OK.
7.
Press Start to start the urgent fax job.
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
3.
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
4.
Press On to enable the job build function.
• Off : Disables Job Build feature.
• On : Enables Job Build feature.
• Display Between Segments : After executing a segment, the job is paused with his screen. Then user can select to keep sending fax or stop.
• Delete : Deletes a segment.
• Delete All : Deletes all segments.
• Send All : Prints all segments.
• Add Segment : Adds a new segment.
• Cancel : Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
5.
Press Add Segment.
6.
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
7.
Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job.
8.
Repeat step 5 to step 7.
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add segments without any restriction.
9.
After adding segments, press Send All.
RECEIVING A FAX
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving methods available.
Changing the receive modes
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode, refer to next steps.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive Mode.
4.
Select the option.
•
Telephone
: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then
Start
.
•
Fax
: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode.
•
Answering Machine/Fax
: Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.
5.
Press OK.
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored in the memory.
Receiving manually in Telephone mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine begins receiving a fax.
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT
socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 18.)
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.
• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering machine, or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy job.
Faxing (Optional)_ 61
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys
9
on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing 9 once again.
To change the
9
to, for example,
3
, follow the next steps.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.
4.
Select On.
5.
Press left/right arrows to display number 9.
6.
Press OK.
Receiving in secure receiving mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.
4.
Select On.
5.
Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the control panel.
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this case, the received fax will be printed out.
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this section.
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to change the default setting on document settings, refer to Admin
Setting
> General tab > Default Settings. (See "General settings" on page 81.)
Duplex
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the value.
• 1 Sided : Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.
• 2 Sided : Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.
Resolution
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.
• Standard : Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will reduce the transmission time.
•
Fine
: Recommended for the originals containing with small characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix printer.
•
Super Fine
: Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Super Fine resolution.
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
Original Type
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document being scanned.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option on the screen and press OK.
• Text : For originals with text or line art.
•
Text/Photo
: For originals with both text and photographs together.
•
Photo
: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance the darkness degree and press OK.
62 _
Faxing (Optional)
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•
Off
: Disables this feature.
•
Auto
: Optimizes the background.
•
Enhance
: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.
•
Erase
: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo.
Color Mode
You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.
• Mono : Transmits a fax in black and white.
• Color : Transmits a fax in color.
Color Mode
faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.
(See "Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)" on page 60.)
SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual and Group.
•
Individual
: Stores up to 500 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..
•
Group
: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries.
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial No..
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)
1.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.
•
Apply
: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list in the Basic tab.
•
Cancel
: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.
2.
Press New.
3.
Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number keypad on the control panel.
•
ID
: Enters the name.
•
Speed Dial No.
: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
•
Fax No.
: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area code if necessary.
4.
Press OK.
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
1.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.
2.
Press New.
3.
Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up, enter the name.
4.
Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.
• Group Dial ID : Enters the group name.
•
Group Dial No.
: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
5.
Press OK.
6.
Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this step until you added entries you need.
•
Edit
: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..
•
New
: Creates the new Speed Dial No..
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..
•
Search
: Searches the fax number which currently stored in
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.
•
Detail
: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is
grouped. (See "Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)" on page 63.)
Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,
Group list.
7.
Press OK to save the numbers.
Faxing (Optional)_ 63
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web
Service
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Individual
1.
Open the web browser in your computer.
2.
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
3.
Press Address Book > Individual.
4.
Press Add.
5.
Enter Name, Speed No., and Fax Number.
6.
Press Apply.
Speed Dial
numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.
Group
1.
Open the web browser in your computer.
2.
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
3.
Press Address Book > Group.
4.
Press Add Group.
5.
Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6.
Add individual ddresses to the fax group.
7.
Press Apply.
USING THE POLLING OPTION
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the original.
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the polling feature.
The polling process is as follows:
1.
Sender stores the originals in the machine. (See "Storing the originals for polling" on page 64.)
2.
Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.
3.
Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when
requested. (See "Polling a remote fax" on page 64.)
4.
Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.
Storing the originals for polling
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.
5.
Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode (The four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store, delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in the
Mailbox
. (See "Storing originals in Mailbox" on page 65.)
6.
Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data will be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If you select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.
7.
Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.
8.
Give the Passcode to the receiver.
Printing (Deleting) the polling document
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).
3.
Enter Passcode
4.
Press OK.
Polling a remote fax
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote machine.
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific time within 24 hours.
3.
Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode from sender with the remote fax machine.
4.
Press OK.
64 _
Faxing (Optional)
Polling from a remote Mailbox
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the Mailbox of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of
Mailbox No.
and Passcode from the sender. (See "Using Mailbox" on page 65.)
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.
7.
Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.
8.
Press Edit Mailbox.
3.
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are filled with information from the sender.
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.
4.
Press OK.
USING MAILBOX
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the
Mailbox must be created.
Creating Mailbox
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter the password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.
5.
Press Mailbox Setup.
6.
Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox List.
9.
Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel.
Up to 20 numbers you can enter.
10.
Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet or number up to 20 digits.
11.
Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel.
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as storing, deleting, printing, receiving.
12.
Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax is received into Mailbox.
13.
Press OK.
Storing originals in Mailbox
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document faced down.
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
Faxing (Optional)_ 65
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.
5.
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are filled with information from the receiver.
5.
Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox in page 65.
6.
Press OK.
PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is successfully completed or not.
The detailed information is available in advanced setup part. (See
"Printing a report" on page 90.)
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send Report.
4.
Press On.
6.
Press OK.
• Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter
Mailbox No.
and Passcode, and then press OK. When the confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.
• Printing a Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter
Mailbox No.
and Passcode, and press OK.
Faxing to a remote Mailbox
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you can use the Send to Remote feature.
1.
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down.
3.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4.
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.
5.
Press OK.
SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Toll Save.
66 _
Faxing (Optional)
6.
Press On.
7.
Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.
8.
Press OK.
9.
Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.
10.
Press OK.
11.
Press OK.
ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY
FAX JOB
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Send Batch.
6.
Press On.
7.
Press OK.
• When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to reserved delay fax.
FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER
DESTINATION
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful.
• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service.
• If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination by faxing.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send
Forward
.
6.
Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.
7.
Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive
Forward
.
6.
Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.
• If you want to set the star time and end time, select Start Time and
End Time .
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set the Forward & Print.
7.
Press OK.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email
I f Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send
Forward .
6.
Press On.
7.
Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display.
8.
Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Receive
Forward .
Faxing (Optional)_ 67
6.
Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display.
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set the Forward & Print.
7.
Press OK.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service prior to this option on.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send
Forward .
6.
Press On.
7.
Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service prior to this option on.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Receive
Forward
.
6.
Press On.
7.
Press OK.
SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can be turned on or off.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4.
Press down arrow on the right side.
5.
Press Fax Ending Sound.
6.
Press On.
7.
Press OK.
68 _
Faxing (Optional)
using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
Plugging in a USB memory device
•
Scanning to an USB memory device
•
•
Changing the scan feature settings
•
Printing from a USB memory device
ABOUT USB MEMORY
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:
• Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.
• Print data stored on a USB memory device.
• Format the USB memory device.
UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN
To use the USB feature, press USB on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
• USB Print : You can directly print files stored on an USB memory
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files. (See
"Printing from a USB memory device" on page 73.)
• Scan to USB : You can specify image size, file format, or color mode
for each scanning to USB job. (See "Scan to USB" on page 70. )
PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE
The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector.
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.
Press USB Format, USB Print or Scan to USB.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of your machine.
•
USB Format
: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.
Using USB memory device_ 69
• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s misuse.
• If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security settings and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.
SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan
setting. (See "Changing the scan feature settings" on page 71.)
Scanning
1.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
2.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.
3.
Press USB from the Main screen.
4.
Press Scan to USB.
5.
Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Changing the scan feature settings" on page 71.)
6.
Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.
7.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the machine.
SCAN TO USB
Basic tab
Advanced tab
• Original Size
: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
Image tab
• Original Type
: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See
• Color Mode : Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(See "Color Mode" on page 71.)
• Darkness : Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 72.)
• Erase Background
: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See
"Erase Background" on page 72.)
• Scan to Edge
: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to
• Back : Returns to the previous screen.
Output tab
• Name : The folder names on the USB memory device.
• Date : Tha date which folders are made.
• Select : Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.
• New Folder : Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.
• Detail : Views the details of currently selected folder or file.
• Rename : Renames the folder or file name.
• Delete : Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.
• Duplex : Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
• Resolution : Selects the scanning resolution value.
• File Name : Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking this field.
• Back : Returns to the previous screen.
70 _
Using USB memory device
• Quality
: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See
•
Scan Preset
: Automatically changes some scan options such as file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 72.)
•
File Format
: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
•
File Policy
: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job, such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after that period, the options will be reset to default values.
Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.
•
1 Sided
: For originals that are printed on one side only.
•
2 Sided
: For originals that are printed on both sides.
•
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2
: For originals that are printed on both sides.
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.
Original Type
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•
Text
: For originals that have text or line art.
•
Text/Photo
: For originals that have both text and photographs together.
•
Photo
: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Color Mode
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•
Color
: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
• Gray : Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.
•
Mono
: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.
Original Size
The machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/ down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode.
Using USB memory device_ 71
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output darker.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
• Off : Disables this feature.
• Auto : Optimizes the background.
• Enhance : The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.
• Erase : The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Scan to Edge
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select On and press OK.
Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality you select a larger file size you get.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.
•
Sharing and Printing
: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality documents.
•
High Quality Printing
: Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size.
•
Archival Record
: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output.
•
OCR
: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect the highest quality images.
•
Simple Scan
: Used for a simple document with text only. The file size of output is small.
•
Custom
: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.
File Format
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.
• PDF : Scans originals in PDF format.
• Single-Page TIFF : Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
• Multi-Page TIFF : Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.
• JPEG : Scans original in JPEG format.
• BMP : Scans original in BMP format.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode.
File Policy
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.
Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.
• Rename : If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed.
• Overwrite :You can set the machine to delete previous job information on USB as you store new job information.
72 _
Using USB memory device
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.
Direct Print option supported file types:
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible.
• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file.
• BMP: BMP Uncompressed
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below
To print a document from a USB memory device:
1.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.
2.
Press USB from the Main screen.
3.
Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file name.
If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.
4.
Press USB Print.
5.
Press Start on the control panel.
Using USB memory device_ 73
using document box
This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
Understanding the Document box screen
•
Storing documents to Document box
Document Box Screen ABOUT DOCUMENT BOX
The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the hard drive. Users can send the stored data to various destinations such as print, fax, e-mail, or an FTP/SMB server. The Document Box provides three types of boxes: public ( ) , secured ( ) , and common ( ) .
The public box can be created by all users and all users can store data to public boxes. The secured box can be created with password by all users.
This means that the only users who know the password can access to the box and store their data. A common box is provided by default. Users cannot create, edit, and delete the common box. When a user needs to store a job that is not assigned to a box (i.e., fax receiving or PC printing in store mode), the data will be stored in the common box by default.
You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen.
The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in delayed mode, printing proof page.
UNDERSTANDING THE DOCUMENT BOX
SCREEN
To use the Document Box feature, press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( screen.
) to go to the Main s
• User Box tab: Create the box where you can save documents such as the file you have printed, sent by email, or scanned. When you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called public box.
• System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you cannot modify them.
• Type : Shows the box is secured or not.
• Box Name : Shows the box name.
• Owner : Shows the user name of a box.
• Date : Shows the date of a box created.
• File : Shows the number of total files in the box.
• Add : Lets you add more boxes.
• Delete : Deletes the selected box.
• Edit : Lets you modify a box name and an owner name.
• Detail : Shows box information.
• Report : Prints the information about the documents inside the selected box.
• Search : Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
• Enter : Prints or sends the stored file in the box.
74 _
Using document box
Box Adding Screen
You can create a new box to store your scanned data. To add a new
Document Box , press Add on the Document Box screen.
The following are some constraints about the document box.
• You can create maximum 100 document boxes.
• A document box can contain up to 200 stored-documents.
• The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters.
• Common ( ) box is already created by default.
•
Box Name
: Enter a box name.
•
Owner
: Enter the user name of the box's owner.
•
Secured Box
: Check to make a secured-type box.
•
New Password
: Enter a new password to access the box.
•
Confirm Password
: Enter the password again.
Edit a Box Screen
You can modify a box name or an owner name. To modify a Document
Box , select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit.
•
Add From Scan
: Lets you add a new document from scanning.
•
Detail
: Shows a document’s information.
•
Search
: Searches a file with a document name or an owner name.
•
Edit
: Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected document.
•
Copy
: Copies a selected document to another document box.
•
Move
: Moves a selected document to another document box.
•
Combine
: Merge documents located in two or more boxes.
•
Send To
: Sends the selected document(s) to a destination such as e-mail, fax, server, or USB.
•
: Prints the selected document(s) out.
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
STORING DOCUMENTS TO DOCUMENT BOX
This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive.
Storing documents from document box
You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.
2.
Press Document Box from the Main screen.
3.
Press a document box with which you need to store a document.
4.
Press Enter.
•
Box Name
: Enter a new box name.
•
Owner
: Enter a user name of a box.
Document List Screen
You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box screen, you can use the stored documents again.
5.
Press Add From Scan.
6.
Set the scan settings.
7.
Press Start to begin scanning.
•
Document Name
: Shows the document’s name.
•
Owner
: Shows the user name of a document.
•
Date
: Shows the date of a document stored.
•
Page
: Shows the number of total pages in the document.
Using document box_ 75
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function
During copying, scanning, or faxing, you can save the scanned originals to
Document Box in your machine.
1.
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.
2.
Press Copy > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
Or press Scan > Scan to Email (Scan to Server or Scan to PC) > the
Basic tab > Saving to box.
Or press Fax > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
3.
Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard.
Then press OK .
4.
Select a destination box and press
OK
.
5.
Press Start from the control panel to begin a job.
76 _
Using document box
using standard workflow
This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen
•
Various Operations with Workform
ABOUT STANDARD WORKFLOW
Standard Workflow
is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs with pre-arranged task sets called workform. Standard Workflow makes it possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job workform. Once you create a workform, you can reuse the same workflow only with one-touch operation.
Workflow Screen
Favorite Tab
Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform. You can select a frequently-used public or private workform, and then the workform appears on the favorite workform tab.
Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving fax.
Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a favorite workform.
INPUT
Scan
Document Box
Fax
TRANSMIT
FTP/SMB server
Document Box
Fax
UNDERSTANDING THE STANDARD
WORKFLOW SCREEN
To use the Standard Workflow feature, press Standard Workflow on the
Main
screen.
To switch to the other display screen, press the left or right arrow on the display screen.
•
Execute
: Start the job defined in the workform.
My Workform and Public Workform Tab
Using standard workflow_ 77
Transmit Tab
• Type : Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not.
• Name : Shows the workform name.
• Input : Shows the workform’s input module name.
• Transmit : Shows the workform’s transmit module name. If two or more modules are added in transmit workform, this column displays
Multi without any icon.
• Properties : Shows the workform’s perperties.
• Create : Creates a new private workform.
• Delete : Deletes the selected workform.
• Edit : Lets you to modify a workform.
• Detail : Shows detailed workform information.
• Search : Searches a workform with a workform name.
• Task : Imports a workform from USB, export a workform to USB, copy or move a workform to public workform. It also makes a shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF.
• Execute : Start the job defined in the workform.
Workform Creating Screen
You can create a new workform. To add a new workform, press Create on the My Workform or Public Workform tab.
You can create maximum 100 workforms.
Input Tab
• Transmit : Shows the workform’s transmit module name.
• Status : shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute and
Save
button are enabled.
• Add Module : Add transmit module(s).
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module.
•
Fax: See "Preparing to fax" on page 58.
•
Email, Server: See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP
• Delete : Deletes the selected module.
• Settings : Configures the setting values for the module.
• Previous : Goes to the next tab.
• Next : Goes to the next tab.
Properties Tab
•
Input
: Shows the workform’s input module name.
•
Status
: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to set every mandatory items of the assigned input module.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute and
Save button are enabled.
•
Settings
: Configures the setting values for the module.
•
Next
: Goes to the next tab.
78 _
Using standard workflow
•
Workform Name
: Sets the workform name.
•
Delay Start
: Schedule the start date and time to start.
•
Expired
: Sets the expire date.
•
Secured
: Locks the workform with password protection.
•
Previous
: Goes to the next tab.
VARIOUS OPERATIONS WITH WORKFORM
User can operate various jobs with workforms. The following items show some example cases.
Scan to multi-destination
You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such as email, SMB/FTP server, document box, and print.
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module.
•
Fax: See "Preparing to fax" on page 58.
•
Email, Server: See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP
Fax forwarding
You can forward the received fax to another destinations. To forward a fax, your machine checks caller’s ID that the fax service provides. When the caller is also Samsung’s fax machine, your machine checks the fax number that the user defined for the machine information.
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting
> Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 90.)
When you need to forward different destination for each caller, you can create several workforms for each caller’s ID.
Auto redirection
If the fax transmission failed, the machine re-sends the fax image to the user’s email address.
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting
> Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 90.)
Delayed start feature
You can schedule the job’s execution time by setting Delay Start in
Properties tab when you creating a workform.
Notification feature
You can notify the job processing result to an email.
Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification in Machine
Setup > Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management
. (See "Standard Workflow Management" on page 90.)
Approval feature
Before executing the transmit module, you can get approval from an administrator.
Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting
> Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 90.)
Using standard workflow_ 79
machine status and advanced setup
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup. Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MACHINE SETUP
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Select the appropriate item for your occasion.
• Back : Returns to the previous screen.
Admin Setting screen
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If the administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every
time you want to use Admin Setting. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
• Machine Status : Shows the current machine status.
• Admin Setting : Allows administrator to set up the machine.
When you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
• Tray Management : Shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
• Usage Page Report : You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Machine Status screen
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.
•
General
tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as
location, date, time, and more. (See "General settings" on page 81.)
•
Setup
tab: Sets the values for fax, network and login. Also you can set to enable the feature listed on the screen.
•
Print/Report
tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a
report of machine features. (See "Printing a report" on page 90.)
•
Back
: Returns to the previous screen.
• Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of the machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.
• Machine Info tab: Displays the detailed information about the
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine. (See
"Browsing the machine’s status" on page 81.)
80 _
Machine status and advanced setup
BROWSING THE MACHINE’S STATUS
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the machine.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.
OPTION
Machine Details
Print/Report
Tray Status
Usage Counters
DESCRIPTION
This option shows the customer support information on the email address and the phone number you stored from Admin Setting. Also, you can check the machine's serial number, or the hardware and software information specification.
You can print various helpful and informative reports such as System Report, Fax Report and
Scan Report
. (See "Printing a machine report" on page 92.)
The screen shows the trays installed on your machine, and their current configurations. Select the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper type and size.
You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far. To print this
report, See "Printing a report" on page 90..
GENERAL SETTINGS
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up the machine parameters.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
3.
Press the General tab.
OPTION
Device Info
Date & Time
Default Settings
Measurements
Timers
Language
Power Saver
DESCRIPTION
The sub-options available are Service Center
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter information on service center and purchasing point.
You can set the date and time. (See "Setting the date and time" on page 29.)
•
Default Window
: Set the first window that will appear on the display screen after turning on the machine or waking up from the Power
Save
. For example, if you select Fax as a default window, the first window will be the
Basic
tab of the Fax feature. In case you want to show ID Copy as a default window, you need to enable this feature in Default Option previously.
•
Default Option
: Changes all the default values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning and
paper at once. (See "Changing the default settings" on page 29.)
•
Home
: Changes the order of windows that will appears on the display screen.
Depending on the optional kit you installed or the category you selected, the selectable options on the display screen may differ.
This option lets you change the measurement unit to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric separation (comma or period).
The machine cancels a printing job if data does not be received in specific time.
•
System Timeout
: The machine returns to the default value after certain time the machine waits. You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes.
•
Held Job Timeout
: The machine holds a job for a specific time period. You can set a time period for at least an hour.
It allows you to change the language that appears on the touch screen.
You can reduce energy consumption by setting these features. Power Saver has three options, first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp under the glass. And Power Save turns off all the fans within the machine after a certain time. Low
Power Save
turns off the fans within the machine
except a core fan for the fuser unit. (See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)
Machine status and advanced setup_ 81
OPTION
Altitude
Adjustment
DESCRIPTION
Tray Management This feature allows you to select the tray and paper you use for a printing job. Paper size, paper type, and paper color options are adjusted here.
Tray Confirmation Message
is to activate the window asking whether you set the paper size and type for the just opened tray.
•
Auto Tray Switch
: If tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and this option is On, then the machine continues printing with paper in tray2.
•
Auto Continue
: When the paper is mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with the letter size paper, but the printing job needs
A4 size paper, the machine will wait for 30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized paper.
• Paper Substitution: When the paper is mismatched, this option sets the machine print
A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice versa.
•
Wide A4
: It is useful when printing in DOS mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode.
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. This feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height district. Higher altitude location need to set this feature to High 3, which affects print quality.
Output Options
Contention
Management
Sound
Supplies
Management
Machine Test
Output Options is for, when the staples run out, you to let the machine stop processing and wait to refill the staples or continue the job. If you set
Within Job Offsetting
to On, the output paper is placed and sorted by printout-sets.
This feature lets you to select the priority between copy jobs and print jobs.
• Priority : Set the priority by numbering the job.
The machine starts from the least to the highest number in order.
• First In, First Out : The machine does an asked job in order.
You can adjust the loudness of the machine sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's error sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong option. Press Selection to sound whenever you press the selection from your touch screen.
The machine gives you the notification of the imaging unit and toner cartridge to reorder, and resets the used fuser counter, bias transfer roller, feed roller and document feeder friction pad counter.
The machine prints the test image patterns using
Image Quality Test Patterns .
82 _
Machine status and advanced setup
OPTION
HDD Spooling
Manual Image
Overwrite
Stored Job File
Policy
Country
Home Window
Background
Multi-Bin
DESCRIPTION
To spool documents in HDD for the network printing, select On.
You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information. To activate this feature, go to Admin
Setting
> the Setup tab > Optional Service and set the Manual Image Overwrite option to
Enable
. After activating this feature, you can overwrite the HDD by pressing Start in the display.
You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
• Rename : If the HDD memory already has the same name when you enter a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed.
• Overwrite : You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information.
You can change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country.
After installing the fax kit, you must change the country.
To change the background image of the machine's LCD UI to suit user’s preference, press
Custom
, select a customized background image file on the list, and then press Load.
Users can register their own background image from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Settings >
Machine Settings > System > Home Window
Customization
, and add your images on the list.
You can set the output mode for multiple bin from the following options:
•
Mailbox
: Stacks the printouts in a bin that the user selects from the output options in the printer driver. You can modify each bin’s name from Rename. You also can merge two or more bins from Link Setup. By using Default
Setup
, you can assign each job’s default bin such as bin 2 for copy job, bin 4 for fax job, etc.
•
Job Seperator
: Stacks the printouts in each seperated bin in sequence by job.
•
Collator
: Stacks the printouts in the same order as the originals.
•
Stacker
: Stacks the printouts in bins one-byone. When bin 1 is full, printouts will be stacked in bin 2.
You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin
Mailbox.
Stamp
OPTION DESCRIPTION
You can print optional information such as ID,
Machine Information
, Date & Time, Comment, and Page Number, on the output paper for tracking.
•
Items
: Select item(s) to print on each paper.
•
Position
: Decide the position to stamp either
Top
or Bottom of paper.
•
Appearance
: Decide the appearance of the text either Opaque or Transparent. When you select Opaque, the text background color is filled with opaque white.
COPY SETUP
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.
OPTION
Manual ID Copy
Setup
DESCRIPTION
This option sets the ID copy settings such as the number of images or copying positions manually.
(
See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy option" on page 43.
FAX SETUP
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and needs.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
The fax options are different from country to country depending on the international communication regulatory. If the display screen does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained herein, it means that the grayed out function does not supported in your communication environment.
Machine ID & Fax
No
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Enter the machine ID and fax number which will be printed at the top of each page. Select the country name. This option usually pre-set for user.
Receive Start Code
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax
machine. (See "Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone" on page 62.)
Error Correction
Mode
Fax Initial Setup
Ring to Answer
Receive Header
Secure Receive
It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other ECM-equipped fax machines. Sending a fax using ECM may take more time.
You can set Receive Mode for Telephone, Fax or
Answering Machine/Fax , and Dial Mode at either
Pulse
(Dial Pulse) or Tone (Multi Frequency).
When you select Answering Machine/Fax, you can receive a fax while the line is being used by
the answering machine. (See "Changing the receive modes" on page 61.)
Contact your local telephone company for Dial
Mode setting information.
You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call.
Use this option to automatically print the page number, date and time of fax reception at the bottom of each page.
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. This feature restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. If you select this option to On, all incoming faxes go into memory.
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to
print out received faxes in memory. (See
"Receiving in secure receiving mode" on page 62.)
Machine status and advanced setup_ 83
OPTION
Received Fax
Printing
Redial
Speaker Volume
Prefix Dial
Junk Fax Setup
Ring Volume
Dial Tone Volume
Mailbox Setup
DESCRIPTION
When receiving a fax containing pages longer than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine. If this feature is set to Off, the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page. The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages. If you set this option to On and set the discard size to
10mm and the received data is longer then the currently set paper in the tray, the machine minuses the data that would have been on the specified discard segment.
The machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine, if it was busy. You can set the number of redial attempts and an interval between attempts.
Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the machine will not use this feature.
This controls the sound when a fax actually starts to transfer data. If this option is On, the machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes. With
Comm.
the machine sounds only until the communication is succeeded. No sound with Off option.
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five digits. This number will be dialed before any automatic number is dialed. User may set this to access a PABX a (example 9) or area code number (example 02). When sending a fax, there may be a job which has same recipient's number in delay jobs. In this case, the machine can send faxes to the same recipient in a batch.
The machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press Junk
Fax Setup
and Edit, then, enter the fax numer. If you have set Caller ID enabled, you can browse the last received fax numbers and select a fax number from the list .
This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you select Off, the machine does not ring.
When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax, you can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone volume, you can use this feature. Value 1 is the lowest volume. Use left/right arrows to adjust the value.
• Document Policy : You can set the document stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents after. Select Delete On Poll of each option to delete, Delete On Print to remain the data.
• Mail Configuration : You can create, edit, or delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox
Name , Mailbox Passcode by pressing options.
(See "Using Mailbox" on page 65.)
If you set the Notification option to On, you are notified when a fax is received in
Mailbox
. (See "Creating Mailbox" on page 65.)
84 _
Machine status and advanced setup
OPTION
Output Tray
DESCRIPTION
This feature lets you select the paper tray to use for receiving a fax.
Toll Save
Send Batch
Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time
for saving. (See "Sending a fax in toll save time" on page 66.)
The machine asks you whether you want to add the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the fax number you have dialed is same as the delay fax
number. (See "Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job" on page 67.)
Fax Forward
Settings
You can forward a sent or received fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. (See "Forwarding a received fax to other destination" on page 67.)
Fax Ending Sound
This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on or off.
Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end
of fax receiving. (See "Setting up the end Fax tone" on page 68.)
Caller ID
If you have set this option, the machine remembers the last twenty fax numbers.
a.Private Automatic Branch Exchange
NETWORK SETUP
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing that, you must have the information concerning the type of network protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine network.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
SECURITY
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the password.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Security.
OPTION
TCP/IP Protocol
Apple Talk
Protocol
Ethernet Speed
Clear Setting
802.1x
IPv6
DESCRIPTION
Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment.
There are lots of parameters to be set, therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is, or consult the network administrator.
For Macintosh network environments, select this option. This option provides packet transmission and routing functionality for networking.
Configure the network transmission speed.
Reverts the network settings to the default values.
You can select the user authentication for network communication.
For details information consult the network administrator.
Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements.
• IPv6 Activate : When you select On, the Host
Name and Link-Local Address will automatically be entered into the address field.
• DHCPv6 Configuration : If you have a
DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the option for default dynamic host configuration.
• Routers : Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
• DHCPv6 Addresses : Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
• DHCPv6 Off : Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
Access Control
.
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service, administrators can classify users into several groups according to each user’s role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be controlled by the group’s role definition. For example, if a group
A only has authorization to use the copy function, users in group A can only copy with the machine: they cannot fax or scan. You can set this feature from SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Security > User Access Control > Authority.
• When the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature is enabled, users just need to log in to the service only one time. Then the system automatically checks the user’s authority based on the user ID and password. The SSO feature is related to all of the security functions such as authentication, authorization and accounting.
The SSO feature can be configured from SyncThru™ Web
Service
. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an
Control
> Authentication> Options.
Machine status and advanced setup_ 85
OPTION
Authentication
Method
No
OPTION
Authentication
Local
Authentication
Network
Authentication
DESCRIPTION
It disables Authentication
Method
.
It enables the local authentication mode. The user ID and password is stored in an internal storage of the device. The administrator can see the user information from the
SyncThru™ Web Service >
Security
> User Access Control
> User Profile menu.
It enables the network authentication mode. When the users already belong to a serverbased networks, the Network
Authentication
system can be simply configured with the existing server. Then the user can access with the ID and password stored in the remote authentication server.
To use any features in Network
Authentication mode, the users have to get a certificate from SMB,
FTP, LDAP, or Keberos server defined in SyncThru™ Web
Service .
OPTION
Authentication
Method
(Continue)
OPTION
Foreign Device
Interface
DESCRIPTION
When you install the optional FDI kit, select Foreign Device
Interface Configuration Setup to activate it.
•
Job Timer
: If there is not enough credit, you can set the machine to cancel a job right away or wait a designated amount of time for a deposit.
•
Print Job Control
: When it is enabled, the both computer printing and copying are possible since the credit remains. With Disable, only the copy printing job needs the credit. (which means a computer printing a report or a fax job needs no credits)
•
Inhibit Services
: When no credit is left, the machine disables the copy job only with
Copy Only
. With All Services, scanning service and copy job are disabled.
•
Internal Credits
: It is used when you cancel the job or when the job is cancelled by the device due to insufficient credits (coin) or is canceled by user’s request. If you select
Enable
, the machine deposits a credit equal to the number of sheets that did not print out correctly, then it prints next job for free (for the amount deposited). With Disable, even if you cancel the printing job, the machine includes jammed paper in the count and the cost of printing.
•
Image Counter
: Depends on whether the machine counts blank white pages.
86 _
Machine status and advanced setup
OPTION
Accounting
Method
OPTION DESCRIPTION
No Accounting It disables accounting features.
Network
Accounting
You can set the network account for users by using SyncThru™
Web Admin Service
’s job accounting plug-in. When the users performs their copy, fax, print, or scan service job with the machine, the account module records it. You can see the report from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service .
Standard
Accounting
You can set the local account for maximum 500 users. When the users perform their copy, fax, print, or scan service job with the machine, the account module records it. You can see the report from Standard Acct. Usage
Report
in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab
> Accounting Reports.
As the device itself can manage user’s ID and usage without any remote server, this feature is highly suitable for small and medium businesses.
The accounting system regards storing a file to a single server as a single count.
• Accounting ID List : It shows the accounting ID list. You can add, edit, or delete the ID.
• Login Setting : You can configure for user to login either with ID and password
(ID & password Login) or with
ID only (ID only Login).
• Accounting ID List : It shows the accounting ID list. You can add, edit, or delete the ID.
• Login Setting : You can configure for user to login either with ID and password
(ID & password Login) or with
ID only (ID only Login).
User Authentication Method
If you are an administrator, you can enable authentication service before using the machine to improve security for the device. If user authentication service has been activated, only authorized users can use the device. With authentication service, you also can give permission to each user and set the maximum number of job executions for a user.
The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled independently. The services refer to the user information differently case by case.
• Using Local Authentication only,
Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to
User Profile
from Security > User Access Control menu.
• Using Network Authentication only,
Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to the user information in the network authentication server. Disables the user in User Profile to access the device.
•
Standard Accounting
only: Refers to the Standard Account List from SyncThru™ Web Service > Security > User Access Control
> Accounting. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
•
Network Accounting
only: Refers to the user information in network authentication server.
Registering local authorized users
1.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go
to access the SyncThru™ Web Service for your machine.
2.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
3.
Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method
.
4.
Select Local Authentication.
5.
Click on the Apply button.
6.
Click on Authority, and check a Role Name according to the current user’s role.
• You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
7.
Click on User Profile and check the users.
• You can add users by clicking the Add button.
• If you want add information to the Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book
.
• Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.
• Select the user’s role from Role item.
8.
Click on Apply.
Register authorized network users
1.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click on Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
3.
Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method .
4.
Select Kerberos, SMB, or LDAP.
Before configuring network authentication, you need to configure
External Authentication Server from Security > Network
Security
5.
Click on the Apply button.
6.
Click on Authority, and check the Role Name according to the current user’s role.
• Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
Machine status and advanced setup_ 87
7.
Click on User Profile and check the users.
• You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
• If you want add the information to Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book option.
• Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.
• Select the user’s role from Role.
8.
Click Apply.
Enabling network authentication by Kerberos
1.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
2.
Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > Kerberos Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3.
Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.
4.
Select the IP Address or Host Name.
5.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 88.
7.
You can add a backup domain as a previous step.
8.
Click on Apply.
Enabling network authentication by SMB
1.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
2.
Select Security > External Authentication Server > SMB Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3.
Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.
4.
Select IP Address or Host Name.
5.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 139.
7.
Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step.
8.
Click on Apply.
Users can add up to 6 alternate domains.
Enabling network authentication by LDAP
1.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
2.
Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server
> LDAP Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
4.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
5.
Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6.
Select IP Address or Host Name.
7.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
8.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 389.
9.
Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP directory tree.
10.
Select Authentication method. There are two options for LDAP server login:
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID
88 _
Machine status and advanced setup
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).
Simple
: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.
11.
Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.
12.
Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).
13.
Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search results, and search timeout.
LDAP Referral
: LDAP client will search the referral server if the
LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP server has a referral server.
14.
Select Search Name Order.
15.
Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may check this option if you want to search for information in a default email address group.
16.
Click on Apply.
User Accounting Method
Enabling Acccounting Method
1.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
3.
Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting >
Accounting Method .
4.
Select Standard Accounting.
If you want to allow users to login only with ID, then check
Authenticate with Login ID only
.
5.
Click on the Apply button.
Standard acccounting List
1.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go
to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 97.)
3.
Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting > Standard
Accounting List
.
4.
Select Standard Accounting.
You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add button. Enter a user’s ID, password and assign job limitation to the user.
5.
Click on the Apply button.
Log
OPTION
Job Log
Operation Log
Security Event
Log
DESCRIPTION
You can enable (or disable) job log to record job processing results. You can print the records in
Machine Setup
> Admin Setting > Print/Report tab
> Job Log Report.
You can enable (or disable) operation log to record various operations such as formatting the system, creating document box, deleting file, etc. You can print the records in Machine Setup > Admin Setting
> Print/Report tab > Operation Log Report.
You can enable or disable security event log to record history such as user authentication, software upgrading, access log, exporting or importing data, etc. You can print the records in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab > Security Event
Log Report
.
Change Admin. Password
You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication.
Information Hiding
OPTION
Hiding Level
Setting
Hiding Method
Setting
OPTION
Show All
Information
DESCRIPTION
All information in Job Status is displayed to all users.
Show Non-
Secure
Information
Only
Non-secured information in Job
Status
is displayed to all users.
The secured information, such as secured received fax list or secured print list, will be displayed only to the owner.
All information in Job Status is displayed to the owner.
Show Own
Information
Only
Char Counts Of
Information
Fixed Counts
Except First
Char
Fixed Counts
Instead of the job name and owner's name in Job Status, you can see a sequence of asterisks
(*) characters.
The job name and owner’s name in Job Status display as many as entered number of asterisks (*) except the first character.
The job name and owner’s name in Job Status display as many as entered number of asterisks (*).
OPTIONAL SERVICE
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.
Copy
OPTION
Analog Fax
Scan to Email
NetScan
Scan to SMB
Scan to FTP
Manual Image
Overwrite
Automatic Image
Overwrite
DESCRIPTION
Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main screen.
After installing the fax kit, select this option Enable to use this machine as a fax machine.
Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from the scan screen.
Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it via network.
Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from the scan screen.
Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from the scan screen.
You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information. Set this option to Enable, go to the
General
tab > Manual Image Overwrite, press
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.
If you select Enable, the machine renews the HDD memory when you save new job on it.
Machine status and advanced setup_ 89
DOCUMENT BOX MANAGEMENT
You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in User Box.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Document Box Management.
OPTION
Complete
Notification
Default Fax
DESCRIPTION
To add a completion notification in your workform, enable this option.
To create and execute a workform including the fax feature, enable this option.
PRINTING A REPORT
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Print/Report tab.
OPTION
Public Box
Deletion
DESCRIPTION
If you set this option to Administrators only, only the administrator can delete the publicly stored boxes in User Box, because the machine will asks the password of administrator.
STANDARD WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT
You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard workflow provides.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management.
OPTION
Auto Redirection
Approve
Complete Report
DESCRIPTION
To create and execute a workform including the auto redirection feature, enable this option.
To create and execute a workform including the approval feature, enable this option.
To add a completion report in your workform, enable this option.
90 _
Machine status and advanced setup
OPTION
Accounting
Reports
OPTION
Supplies
Information
Network Auth.
Log Report
Usage Page
Report
Accounting
Report
Standard Acct.
Usage Report
Standard Acct.
Remain Report
DESCRIPTION
You can print Network
Configuration
, PS3 Font List,
PCL Font List and Schedule
Jobs Report
. Schedule Jobs
Report shows the job list in pending, in delayed faxing or the
Mailbox list as well.
You can print the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far.
It displays user login IDs and emails.
You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Prints the report of printing out count for each login user.
Prints the used amount of
Standard Accounting
Prints the remained amount of
Standard Accounting
OPTION
Report
OPTION
Configuration
Report
DESCRIPTION
You can print a report on the machine's overall configuration.
Report
(Continue)
Fax Report
Confirmation
Report
You can set to print the information of a fax reports.
• Multi Send Report : When you fax to several destination, set this option to print a transmission report. On is to print every time you send a fax, the machine prints a confirmation report. With On-
Error , only when the transmission error occurred, the report will be printed out.
• Fax Send Report
Appearance : You can select whether the image on the confirmation report shows or not.
• Fax Sent/Received Report :
The machine stores the logs on each transmission and prints out every 50 logs with this option On. It you select
Off , the machine stores the logs but does not print.
• Fax Send Report : The machine prints the confirmation report after each fax job, only when you send a fax to one destination.
The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via Scan to Email
.
•
On
: The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed.
•
Off
: No report is printed after completing a job.
•
On-Error
: Only in case of error occurrence, the machine prints the report.
Scan to Server
Confirmation
The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP.
• On : The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed.
• Off : No report is printed after completing a job.
• On-Error : Only in case of error occurrence, the machine prints the report.
You can also print machine's status information and browse status with SyncThru Web Service. Open the web browser on your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine.
When SyncThru Web Service opens, click Information > Print information .
Machine status and advanced setup_ 91
maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes
•
•
•
•
Sending the toner reorder notification
•
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
•
•
•
Maintaining the Toner cartridge
•
•
•
Managing your machine from the website
PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT
See "Printing a report" on page 90.
MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE
If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Machine Status.
3.
Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage remaining.
FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next steps.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details.
SENDING THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER
NOTIFICATION
You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is almost over and needs to be reordered.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit
Reorder Notification
.
4.
Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not, and press
Imaging Unit Low Alert Level
to set the remained life level.
5.
Press OK.
SENDING THE TONER REORDER
NOTIFICATION
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to be reordered.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press OK.
3.
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge
Reorder Notification
.
4.
Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not, and press Toner Low
Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5.
Press OK.
CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX
The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
• User Box tab: Create the box where you can save the document such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called public box.
•
System Box
tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you cannot modify them.
•
Type
: Shows the box is secured or not.
•
Box Name
: Shows the box name.
• Owner : Shows the user name of a box.
•
Date
: Shows the date of a box created.
•
File
: Shows the number of total files in the box.
• Add : Lets you add more boxes.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected box.
• Edit : Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.
• Detail : Shows box information.
•
Search
: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
• Enter : Prints or sends the stored file in the box.
92 _
Maintenance
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
Cleaning the inside
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the transfer unit
The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its printing quality. The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10,000 pages printing.
1.
Prepare a soft lint-free cloth.
2.
Turn off the machine.
3.
Unplug the power cable.
4.
Open the side cover.
6.
Close the side cover.
7.
Plug the power cable and turn the machine on.
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day, as needed.
1.
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2.
Open the scanner lid.
3.
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.
5.
Wipe the surface of the transfer unit.
1 white sheet
2 DADF glass
3 scanner lid
4 scanner glass
4.
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry.
5.
Close the scanner lid.
Maintenance_ 93
MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Toner cartridge storage
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
• Inside the protective bag from the original package
• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)
• Do not store consumables in;
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.
Handling instructions
• Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-
Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
• Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-
Samsung brand toner cartridge.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner cartridge is completely empty:
• Toner is empty. Replace toner cartridg appears on the display.
• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.Check the type of the
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Supplies" on page 119.)
1.
Open the side cover.
2.
Open the front cover.
3.
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to release the toner cartridge.
94 _
Maintenance
4.
Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.
9.
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.
5.
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
6.
Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
7.
Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine.
10.
Close the front cover, then the side cover.
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it may cause malfunction of the machine.
MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT
Expected cartridge life
The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80,000 pages. The screen displays Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one when the life of the imaging unit is almost ended. Approximately 6,000 more pages can be made after the warning message related to the imaging unit, but you should have a replacement imaging unit in stock. Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type and media size.
•
Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one
appears on the display.
For ordering information for imaging unit. (See "Supplies" on page 119.)
To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Replacing the imaging unit
1.
Open the side cover.
8.
Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.
Maintenance_ 95
2.
Open the front cover.
5.
Pull the used imaging unit out.
3.
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to release the toner cartridge.
6.
Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.
7.
Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge.
8.
Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times.
4.
Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the green part, midside of the imaging unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
9.
Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place, making sure not to touch the surface of the imaging unit.
The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit.
96 _
Maintenance
10.
Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place.
11.
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.
12.
Close the front cover, then the side cover.
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it may cause malfunction of the machine.
MAINTENANCE PARTS
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired.
ITEMS
DADF rubber pad
YIELD (AVERAGE)
Approx. 50,000 pages
Multi-purpose tray rubber pad
DADF feed roller
Multi-purpose tray feed roller
Approx. 50,000 pages
Approx. 250,000 pages
Approx. 200,000 pages
Approx. 125,000 pages
Transfer roller
Fuser unit Approx. 250,000 pages
Approx. 250,000 pages
Paper Feed roller
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan.
MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE
WEBSITE
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s
SyncThru™ Web Service , an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™
Web Service to:
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change the printer properties.
• Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
1.
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
2.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
SyncThru™ Web Service
allows administrator to set up the machine. If you want to access Settings or Security menu, login first. Press Login button, and enter user ID and password from the pop-up window. Then press LOGIN button.
The initial administrator’s setting is as follows:
• The default ID: admin
• The default password: sec00000
Maintenance_ 97
troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
Understanding display messages
•
2.
Open the DADF cover.
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 98.
•
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (see
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
•
Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 38.)
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex) is not supported.
3.
Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.
In the printer properties window, set the page orientation to be rotated
90 degrees. See Software section.
CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming message appears on the display screen.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document gently and slowly.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or mixed paper-type originals.
1.
Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.
If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed. (See
4.
Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any, in the DADF.
98 _
Troubleshooting
Misfeed of exiting paper
1.
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.
2.
Open the DADF cover.
Roller misfeed
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
3.
Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the DADF.
1 scanner lid
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.
3.
Open the white document background.
4.
Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the documents back in the DADF.
4.
Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.
5.
Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back into the DADF.
Troubleshooting_ 99
CLEARING PAPER JAMS
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.
MESSAGE
Paper Jam in tray 1 ,
Paper Jam in tray 2 ,
Paper Jam in tray 2
(HCF) ,
Paper Jam in tray 3 ,
Paper Jam in tray 3
(HCF) ,
Paper Jam in tray 4 ,
Paper Jam in MP tray
LOCATION OF JAM
In the paper feed area
(tray 1, optional tray, or multi-purpose tray)
GO TO
See "In the multipurpose tray" on page 103.
See "In the optional tray" on page 101.
See "In the optional high capacity feeder" on page 102.
Paper Jam in exit area
Paper Jam inside of machine
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
In the paper exit area
See "In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge" on page 104.
See "In the paper exit area" on page 104.
Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path,
Paper Jam at the top of duplex path,
Paper Jam inside of duplex path
In the duplex unit
See "In the duplex unit area" on page 104.
Paper jam in front of finisher
Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s duplex
In the stacker unit
In the stacker unit
See "Paper jam in front of finisher" on page 105.
See "Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s duplex" on page 105.
Paper jam at exit of finisher
In the stacker unit
See "Paper jam at exit of finisher" on page 106.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam.
In the tray 1
1.
Pull out the paper tray to open. After you pull it out completely, lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine.
2.
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and then close it to clear the error message on the display.
If there is any resistance, and the paper does not move immediately when you pull, stop pulling. Then:
3.
Open the side cover.
Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface. Scratches or smudges will result in poor print quality.
100 _
Troubleshooting
4.
Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown.
2.
Open the inner cover of tray 2.
5.
Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of the
Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine, then insert it completely.
3.
Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
In the optional tray
This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other optional trays, since the method is same as the tray 2.
1.
Open the outer cover in tray 2.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4.
Pull out the optional tray 2.
5.
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 6.
Troubleshooting_ 101
6.
Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
2.
Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.
7.
Insert the tray 2 and close the two covers.
3.
Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.
In the optional high capacity feeder
1.
Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4.
Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.
102 _
Troubleshooting
5.
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine.
7.
Insert the optional high capacity feeder and close the two covers.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 6.
If you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 6.
6.
Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.
In the multi-purpose tray
1.
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
2.
Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
Troubleshooting_ 103
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1.
Open the side cover.
In the paper exit area
1.
Open the side cover.
2.
Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.
2.
Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.
3.
Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
3.
Close the side cover.
In the duplex unit area
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.
1.
Open the side cover.
2.
Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily.
104 _
Troubleshooting
3.
Remove the jammed paper.
4.
Close the side cover.
In the stacker (finisher)
Paper jam in front of finisher
1.
Open the stacker front cover.
5.
Close the stacker front cover.
Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s duplex
1.
Open the stacker front cover.
2.
Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever 1b down as well.
2.
Press the right part of lever (1c) and hold still, then push the stacker to the left to release the stacker.
3.
Remove the jammed paper.
3.
Remove the jammed paper.
4.
Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.
Troubleshooting_ 105
4.
Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.
Paper jam at exit of finisher
1.
Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if necessary.
Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order.
• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.
• When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message.
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models.
• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.
• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service center, this error code help to handle the problem.
• You may see an exclamation mark ( ) or a cross mark ( ) on the upper left of the display, in that case, press the question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies.
.
MESSAGE
[yyy] is worn.
Replace with new one
Imaging unit is empty. Replace it
MEANING
The life of the part expires totally.
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Replace the part with a new one. Call for service.
DC motor does not operate: [zzz].
Please turn off then on
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove received fax Job
Finisher door is open. Close it
There is a problem in the control of DC motor unit.
The finisher cover is not securely latched.
Finisher error: [zzz].
Please turn off then on
There is a problem in the finisher unit.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Did not supply enough toner.
Remove seal tape & reinstall
Did not supply enough toner.
Please open/close door
Fax memory is almost full. Print or remove received fax
Job
Not supplied toner to the imaging unit.
The machine received several papers with many images, and it cannot supply the toner properly.
There is no more available fax memory.
No more fax data can be received.
• Remove the sealing tape from the imaging unit.
• Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times, and reinstall it.
• Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
Open side door and close it. If the problem still persists, please call for service.
Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory. Call for service.
Available fax memory is now 1MB.
Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory. Call for service.
Close the finisher until it locks into place.
Fuser error: [zzz].
Please turn off then on
Fuser unit is not installed correctly.
Install it
There is a problem in the fuser unit working.
The fuser unit is not installed or correctly.
Turn the machine off and reinstall the finisher again. Check that the finisher cable is connected properly. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Install the fuser unit.
Call for service.
The toner in the imaging unit has run out.
Replace the imaging unit with a Samsunggenuine toner cartridge.
(See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
106 _
Troubleshooting
LSU error: [zzz].
Please turn off then on
MESSAGE
Imaging unit is not compatible. Check user’s guide
Imaging unit is not installed. Install it
Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one
MEANING
The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine.
The imaging unit is not installed, or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the cartridge is not connected.
The imaging unit is at the end of its life.
When the imaging unit replacement message appears on the screen and if you select
Continue
, this message displays.
There is a problem in the control of LSU unit.
There is a problem in the control of motor unit.
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Install a Samsunggenuine imaging unit, designed for your machine.
Install the imaging unit.
If it is already installed, try to reinstall the imaging unit.
If the problem persists, please call for service.
Replace a imaging unit with a Samsunggenuine imaging unit.
(See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Motor does not operate: [zzz].
Please turn off then on
Original paper does not feed in scanner
Original paper is too long for scanner.
Check size
The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the scan sensor within the correct time after actuating the registration sensor.
Oversized document or double-feeding of originals.
Open the DADF cover and remove jammed
original. (See "Clearing document jams" on page 98.)
Original paper jam in front of scanner
Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path
The originals are jammed in DADF.
Paper has jammed during duplex printing in the DADF.
Open the DADF cover and remove the
"Clearing document jams" on page 98.)
Check the document size whether it is
supported. (See "DADF document size" on page 124.)
Open the DADF cover and remove the
"Clearing document jams" on page 98.)
"Clearing document jams" on page 98.)
MESSAGE
Original paper jam inside of scanner
Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner
Paper jam at exit of finisher
MEANING
The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the gate sensor within the correct time after actuating the scan sensor.
When the machine is on, jammed paper is detected in the DADF.
The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the duplex sensor within the correct time when the document was fed the wrong way.
Paper jammed in the stacker exit part.
Paper has jammed during duplex printing.
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Open the DADF cover and remove the
"Clearing document jams" on page 98.)
Lift up the document input tray and remove the jammed original.
(See "Clearing document jams" on page 98.)
Pull jammed paper from the stacker exit.
Clear the jam. (See "In the duplex unit area" on page 104.)
Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path
Paper Jam at the top of duplex path
Paper Jam in exit area
Paper jam in front of finisher
Paper has jammed in the fuser area.
Paper jammed in the stacker.
Clear the jam. (See "In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge" on page 104.)
Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b.
Paper jam inside finisher
Paper Jam in MP tray
Paper Misfed from multi-purpose tray
Paper Jam in tray 1
Paper misfed from tray
Paper Jam in tray 2 Or paper has jammed in the tray feed area.
Paper Jam in tray 2
(HCF)
Or the tray cover is opened.
Clear the jam. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on page 103.)
Clear the jam. (See "In the tray 1" on page 100
and see "In the optional tray" on page 101 and
see "In the optional high capacity feeder" on page 102)
Paper Jam in tray 3
Paper Jam in tray 3
(HCF)
Paper Jam in tray 4
Paper jam inside finisher’s duplex
Paper jammed in the stacker.
Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b.
Troubleshooting_ 107
Paper Jam inside of duplex path
Paper Jam inside of machine
Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred
Shake toner cartridge
Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it
Staple cartridge is not installed. Install it in finisher
System error: [zzz].
Please turn off then on
MESSAGE
This IP address conflicts with an IP address already in use. Check it
Toner cartridge is not compatible.
Check user’s guide
The CCD (Charged
Couple Device) lock has been locked. The
CCD does not detect its home location or move.
low.
MEANING
Paper has jammed during duplex printing.
Paper has jammed in the registration area.
The toner supply is
Stapler is run out.
The staple cartridge is not installed.
There is a problem in the system operation.
The IP address is used in other place elsewhere.
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Clear the jam. (See "In the duplex unit area" on page 104.)
Clear the jam. (See "In the paper exit area" on page 104.)
Unlock the CCD lock.
(See "Front view" on page 18.) Or turn off
the machine and on again. Try again. If the problem persists, call for service.
Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
Order Staple Cartridge.
Cartridge" on page 119.) And replace
Install the staple cartridge following the steps explained on the back of the finisher
door. (See "Replacing the Stapler" on page 122.) If you want
to continue the print job and disregard of this error message, go to
Admin Setting to
"General settings" on page 81.)
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address.
The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine.
Install a Samsunggenuine toner cartridge, designed for your machine.
MESSAGE
Toner cartridge is not installed. Install it
Toner cartridge is worn. Replace with new one
Toner is empty.
Replace toner cartridge
Toner is low. Order new toner cartridge
Too much paper in finisher stacker.
Remove printed paper
MEANING
The toner cartridge is not installed or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the cartridge is not properly connected.
The toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
When the toner cartridge replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue, this message displays.
The lifespan of the toner cartridge which the arrow indicates is reached.
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
The stacker is full of printouts.
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Try to reinstall the toner cartridge.
Rplace a toner cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 94.)
This message appears when the toner is completely empty, and your machine stops printing. Replace the toner cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 94.)
Ensure a replacement cartridge is in stock.
Remove printouts from the stacker.
Too much paper in output bin tray.
Remove printed paper
Use Auxiliary
Access
The printed papers are full on the output tray.
The credit is not enough to access the job according to
Foreign Device.
Remove printed outs from the output tray.
Insert credit into the
Foreign Device.
108 _
Troubleshooting
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Touch screen problem
CONDITION
The touch screen does not show anything.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Paper feeding problems
CONDITION
Paper is jammed during printing.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 100.)
Paper sticks together.
• Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
(See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.
• Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,
clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 100.)
Paper does not feed into the machine.
• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the
machine. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• If an original does not feed into the machine, the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced. Contact a service representative.
CONDITION
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The paper keeps jamming.
Transparencies stick together in the paper exit.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the multi-purpose tray.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove the debris.
• If an original does not feed into the machine, the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.
Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
Troubleshooting_ 109
Printing problems
CONDITION
The machine does not print.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The machine is not receiving power.
The machine is not selected as the default printer.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Check the power cord connections. Check the power switch and the power source.
Select Samsung SCX-6x55
Series PCL 6 or Samsung
SCX-6x55 Series PS as your default printer in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
• The side cover is not closed. Close the side cover.
•
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See
"Clearing paper jams" on page 100.)
•
No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See "Loading paper" on page 36.)
• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed. Install the toner cartridge or the imaging unit.
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly.
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it.
The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective.
The port setting is incorrect.
The machine may be configured incorrectly.
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.
The machine is malfunctioning.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different printer cable.
Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one.
Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.
Repair the printer software.
See Software section.
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative.
CONDITION
The machine does not print.
(Continued)
The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job.
The paper option that was selected in the printer properties may be incorrect.
A print job is extremely slow.
Half the page is blank.
The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete.
The job may be very complex.
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.
The paper size and the paper size settings do not match.
The printer cable is loose or defective.
The wrong printer driver was selected.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the printer properties. Select the correct paper source.
See the printer driver help screen.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.
Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use.
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works. Finally, try a new printer cable.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.
Try printing a job from another application.
The software application is malfunctioning.
The operating system is malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and then back on again.
110 _
Troubleshooting
CONDITION
Pages print, but they are blank.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.
The file may have blank pages.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Contact a service representative.
The printer does not print PDF file correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing.
Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products.
Your machine has an odd smell during initial use.
The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating.
The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
After printing about 100 color pages, there will be no more smell. It is a temporary issue.
The resolution of the photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced.
The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete.
If you are under the
DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly.
Suggested solutions: Change
"Changing the display language" on page 29.)
Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray.
Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
CONDITION
Toner specks
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may
be too moist or rough. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver and refer to
Software section
, respectively.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Contact a service representative.
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU, contact a service representative.
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or
rough. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.
(See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to printer properties, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.
• If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Troubleshooting_ 111
CONDITION
White Spots
Vertical lines
Color or Black background
Toner smear
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
White spots appears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.
Clean the inside of your machine. (See
"Cleaning the transfer unit" on page 93.)
Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning.
Contact a service representative.
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface(drum part) of the imaging unit inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.
Contact a service representative.
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
•
Change to a lighter weight paper. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading.
• Remove the old imaging unit and then,
install a new one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a service representative.
•
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
CONDITION
Vertical repetitive defects
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the cartridge; contact a service representative. After the printout, if you still have the same problems, remove the imaging unit and then, install a new one.
(See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open A packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in printer properties.
Misformed characters
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock
may be too slick. Try different paper. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit may need service. Contact a service representative.
Page skew • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
•
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.
112 _
Troubleshooting
CONDITION
Curl or wave
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper
curl. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Wrinkles or creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
•
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a service representative.
Solid Color or
Black pages
A
Loose toner
• The imaging unit may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
• The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a service representative.
•
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 33.)
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 95.)
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
CONDITION
Character Voids
A
Horizontal stripes
Curl
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications. (See "Specification on print media" on page 33.)
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
• The imaging unit may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a
new one. (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 94.)
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray.
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to printer properties, click Paper tab, and set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the
Software section
for details.
An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs.
Your printer is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging. You can set this option through Paper or Printer tab in
printer driver’s properties. (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 28.)
Copying problems
CONDITION
Copies are too light or too dark.
Smears, lines, marks, or spots appears on copies.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or lighten the backgrounds of copies.
• If the defects are on the original, press
Light and Dark arrows to lighten the background of your copies.
• If there are no defects on the original, clean
the scan unit. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 93.)
Troubleshooting_ 113
CONDITION
Copy image is skewed.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
• Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
Blank copies print out.
Image rubs off the copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams occur.
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight. 75 g/m 2 bond paper is recommended.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other documents that use more toner.
• The machine may be turned on and off frequently.
• The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.
Scanning problems
CONDITION
The scanner does not work.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
• Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the DADF.
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the printer cable is connected properly.
• Make sure that the printer cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the
SmarThru Configuration or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
• In case of use of account feature, make sure that you have extra scan count remaining.
For example, if you try to scan 10-page document while you have 5 scan count left, the scan job would be canceled.
114 _
Troubleshooting
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The unit scans very slowly.
• Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
Message appears on your computer screen:
• “Device can't be set to the H/W mode you want.”
• “Port is being used by another program.”
• “Port is Disabled.”
• “Scanner is busy receiving or printing data.
When the current job is completed, try again.”
• “Invalid handle.”
• “Scanning has failed.”
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished, try your job again.
• The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
• The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
Network Scan problems
CONDITION
I cannot find a scanned image file.
I cannot find the scanned image file after scanning.
I forgot my ID and
PIN.
I cannot view the
Help file.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
You can check the destination for the scanned file on the Advanced page in the Network
Scan program’s Properties screen.
• Check if the scanned file is on your computer.
• Check Send image immediately to the specified folder using an associated default application
on the Advanced page in the Properties screen of the Network
Scan
program to open the scanned image immediately after scanning.
Check your ID and PIN in the Server page in the Properties screen of the Network Scan program.
To view the Help file, you need to have Internet
Explorer 4 service pack 2 or above.
Fax problems
CONDITION
The machine is not working, there is no display and the buttons are not working.
•
•
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
No dial tone sounds.
• Check that the phone line is properly connected.
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book
list. (See "Setting up a fax phonebook" on page 63.)
The original does not feed into the machine.
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick or thin.
• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.
• The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.
Faxes are not received automatically.
The machine does not send.
There are lines on the originals you sent.
• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
• Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
• Make sure that the original is loaded in the
DADF or on the scanner glass.
• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor-quality.
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace
the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 94.)
Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
(See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 93.)
The machine dials a number, but the connection with the other fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.
Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to solve out the problem.
CONDITION
Faxes do not store in memory.
Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages, with a small strip of text at the top.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display shows the low Fax memory is full. Print or remove received fax
Job
message, delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again. Please call for service.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. For details
about paper settings. (See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 38.)
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are being used.
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.
PROBLEM
PostScript file cannot be printed.
“Limit Check
Error” message appears.
The print job was too complex.
A PostScript error page prints.
The print job may not be PostScript.
The optional tray is not selected in the driver.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly.
The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray.
SOLUTION
• Install the PostScript driver, referring to
Software section.
• Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing.
• If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device
Settings tab, and set the Tray option of the Installable
Options section to Installed.
Troubleshooting_ 115
PROBLEM
The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy from Acrobat
Reader with a collate option.
(only in Window/
Macintosh)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
It might take longer to print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy with a collate option. (only in
Linux)
Turning off collation options on applications
(including CUPS pstops collation option) may solve this problem.
SOLUTION
Try to print with the latest
Adobe Reader program or print with turning on "Print as
Image" option from Acrobat printing options. It might take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
If you want to use the collation option, go to printer driver’s advanced option and turn the collation on.
Common Windows problems
CONDITION
“File in Use” message appears during installation.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the StartUp Group, then restart
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred.” messages appear.
These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
Common Linux problems
CONDITION
The machine does not print.
Some color images come out all black.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
• Check if the printer is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the
Selected printer pane. If its status contains
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.
After that normal operation of the printer should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred. For instance, this could be an attempt to print document when port is claimed by a scanning application.
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button, if you are sure that the present owner is not functioning properly.
• Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item.
• The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space.
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for
Color Matching System, you should upgrade
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com.
116 _
Troubleshooting
CONDITION
Some color images come out in unexpected color.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least
GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com.
The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed.
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252.
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/ projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.
• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or
Gimp home page. For the detail information, refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or
Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use other kind of scan application, refer to the Help for application.
I encounter error
“Cannot open port device file” when printing a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurred, try to release the port.
CONDITION
The machine does not appear on the scanners list.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
• Check if your machine is attached to your computer. Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on.
• Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the window.
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. This can usually happen while starting scan procedure, and appropriate message box appears.
• To identify the source of the problem, you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol / dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at / dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/ mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button, if you are sure that the present port's owner is not functioning properly.
Troubleshooting_ 117
CONDITION
The machine does not scan.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
• Check if a document is loaded into the machine.
• Check if your machine is connected to the computer. Make sure if it is connected properly if I/O error is reported while scanning.
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other “consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. This can usually happen while starting scan procedure, and appropriate message box will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol / dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at / dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/ mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button, if you are sure that the present port’s owner is not functioning properly.
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
CONDITION
The printer does not print PDF file correctly.
Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products:
Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
CONDITION
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or higher.
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac
OS 10.3.2.
Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing.
This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally at the
Cover page.
When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.
Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages.
118 _
Troubleshooting
ordering supplies and accessories
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country.
•
SUPPLIES
When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out, you can order the following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine:
TYPE
Toner cartridge a
AVERAGE YIELD A
Approx. 25,000
PART NUMBER
SCX-D6555A
Imaging unit b
Approx. 80,000 SCX-R6555A a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
b.Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4- or letter-sized paper.
Depending on the options and job mode, the imaging unit’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.
ACCESSORIES
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
ACCESSORY
Memory module
DESCRIPTION
Extends your machine’s memory capacity.
PART NUMBER
ML-MEM160: 256 MB
This machine comes with
256 MB DIMM.
To expand the memory of your machine, you must remove the existing DIMM and purchase a larger one.
ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION
Optional tray 2/3/4 If you are experiencing paper supply problems frequently, you can attach an additional 520 sheet tray. You can print documents in various sizes and types of print materials.
High capacity feeder
Fax option kit
Stand
Stacker & Stapler
(Finisher)
PART NUMBER
SCX-S6555A
If you are frequently experiencing paper supply problems, you can attach an additional
2,100 sheet tray.
This kit lets you use your machine as a fax machine.
SCX-HCF100
SCX-FAX210 a
After installing the kit, you have to set up your machine to activate this machine. (See
You can place the machine on the ergonomicallydesigned cabinet which lets you reach the machine conveniently.
Also, you can easily move the cabinet with its wheels, if necessary, and store miscellaneous items like papers into the cabinet.
• Tall Stand: SCX-
DSK10T
• Short Stand: SCX-
DSK10S
If you do not use the optional tray then Tall Stand is recommended. In case you add three optional trays, use Short
Stand.
500 sheets SCX-FIN10S
Staple Cartridge
SmarThru
WorkFlow
3 x 5,000 staples per package, covers maximum thickness of
50 sheets, 1 staple position.
This feature lets you send additional information along with the scanned document to a specified network location.
SCX-STP000
SCX-KIT11S
Ordering supplies and accessories_ 119
ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
FDI (Foreign
Device Interface) kit
4-Bin Mailbox
This card is installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the payfor-print service on your machine.
You can load up to 100 sheets of paper in each stacker. To use 4-Bin
Mailbox, you need to purchase and install 2-
Bin Finisher first.
SCX-KIT10F
SCX-MBT40S
2-Bin
Finisher(Stacker
&Stapler)
The 2-Bin Finisher consists of big size output tray which holds up to 500 sheets of paper and small size output tray which holds up to 100 sheets of paper.
SCX-FIN20S a.Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany,
Italia, France, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, Austria, Switzerland,
Belgium, Hungary.
HOW TO PURCHASE
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit www.samsungprinter.com
and select your country/region to obtain information on calling for technical support.
120 _
Ordering supplies and accessories
installing accessories
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.
This chapter includes
•
Precautions to take when installing accessories
•
•
•
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit
4.
Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.
PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING
ACCESSORIES
• Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
• Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again.
INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this
DIMM slot to install additional memory.
Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB.
The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM. (See "Memory module" on page 119.)
Installing a memory module
1.
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2.
Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM and its slot.
5.
Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a “click”.
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly, carefully try the previous procedure again.
3.
Take out a new memory DIMM from the plastic bag.
1 control board cover
Installing accessories_ 121
6.
Replace the control board cover.
REPLACING THE STAPLER
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the staple cartridge appears on the display screen.
1.
Open the finisher cover.
7.
Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.
Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.
1.
Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software section .
2.
Click the Windows Start menu.
3.
For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows /2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers
.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers
.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers
.
4.
Select the Samsung SCX-6x55 Series PS printer.
5.
Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.
6.
Select Device Settings.
7.
Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the
Installable Options
section.
8.
Click OK.
2.
Pull the stapler unit out.
3.
Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.
4.
Unpack the new staple cartridge.
122 _
Installing accessories
5.
Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.
6.
Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.
7.
Close the finisher cover.
ENABLING FAX FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING
THE FAX OPTION KIT
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use this function.
1.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2.
Press Admin Setting.
3.
When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 28.)
4.
Press the General tab.
5.
Press Country.
Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country.
Installing accessories_ 123
specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.
This chapter includes;
•
•
•
•
•
Facsimile specifications (optional)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
DADF
DADF document size
Paper input capacity
Paper output capacity
Consumables
Power rating
Power consumption
Noise level
Operating environment
Display
Toner cartridge yield b a
Boot-up time
Description
Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond)
• Width: 148.5 to 218 mm
• Length: 145 to 356 mm
• Tray 1: 520 multi-page for plain paper (75 g/m 2 )
• Multi-purpose tray: 100 multi-page for plain paper
(75 g/m 2 )
• optional tray 2/3/4: 520 multi-page for plain paper
(75 g/m 2 )
• optional high capacity feeder: 2,100 multi-page for plain paper (75 g/m 2 )
For details about paper input capacity, see
"Specification on print media" on page 33.
• Face down: 500 sheets 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond)
• Optional stacker: 500 sheets 75 g/m 2 bond)
(20 lb
2-piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system
110 - 127 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine.
• Average operation mode: Less than 900 W
• Power save mode: Less than 85 W
• Stand by mode: Less than 120 W
• Standby mode: Less than 30 dBA
• Printing mode: Less than 55 dBA
• Copying mode: Less than 57 dBA
Less than 35 seconds (from sleep mode)
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a lot in the HDD
Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH wVGA (800 x 480 x RGV) color
Average Cartridge Yield 25,000 standard pages.
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC
19752.
Item Description
Approx. 80,000 pages
Imaging unit yield c
Memory
External dimension
(W x D x H)
256 MB (max. 512 MB)
633 x 506 x 641 mm (24.92 x 19.92 x 25.23 inches) without optional trays
Weight
44.85 Kg (including consumables)
Package weight Paper: 5.4 Kg, Plastic: 1.2 Kg a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779 b.Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size.
c. May be affected by operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type and media size.
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Printing method
Description
Laser Beam Printing
Up to 53 ppm in A4 (55 ppm in Letter)
Printing speed a
Duplex printing speed
Up to 50 ipm in A4 (52 ipm in Letter)
First print out time
8 seconds (from ready)
Print resolution
Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi Effective output
Printer language
PCL 6, PS 3, PDF Direct V1.4, TIFF, JPEG
OS compatibility
Interface b
• PCL Driver: Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/
Server 2008 R2
• PS Driver: Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/
Server 2008 R2, Various Linux OS,
Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6
High Speed USB 2.0
Device x1, High Speed USB 2.0 HOST
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX
124 _
Specifications
a.Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connect on method, media type, media size, and job complexity.
b.Please visit www.samsungprinter.com
to download the latest software version.
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
Up to 53 ppm in A4 (55 ppm in Letter)
Copy speed a
Duplex copy speed
First copy out time
Copy resolution
• Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 50 ipm in A4
(52 ipm in Letter)
• Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 35 ipm in A4
(37 ipm in Letter)
• Scanner glass: Less than 5 seconds
• DADF: Less than 8 seconds
• Scan:up to 600 x 300 (text, text/photo), up to 600 x 600 (photo)
• Print:up to 600 x 600 (text, text/photo), up to 1,200 x 1,200 (photo)
Zoom rate • Scanner glass: 25 to 400%
• DADF: 25 to 200%
1 to 999 pages
Multiple copies a.Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
TWAIN standard / WIA standard
Compatibility
Scanning method DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) module
Resolution a TWAIN standard: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Up to 4,800 x
4,800 dpi by software enhancement)
WIA standard: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Scan to USB, NetScan: 100, 200, 300 dpi
Network Scan File format
Scan to E-mail, Scan to Server: 100, 200, 300, 400,
600 dpi
PDF, TIFF, JPEG b
Effective scanning length
Effective scanning width
• Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)
Item
Color bit depth
Mono bit depth
Description
• Internal: 36 bits
• External: 24 bits
1 bit for Linearity & Halftone
8 bits (External), 12 bits (Internal) for Gray scale
Grayscale 256 levels a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might differ.
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode.
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)
Item
Compatibility
Applicable line
Data coding
Modem speed
ITU-T G3, Super G3
Description
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)
33.6 Kbps
Transmission speed
Up to 3 seconds/page a
Maximum document length
Resolution
• Scanner glass: 356 mm (14 inches)
• Duplex automatic document glass: 356 mm
(14 inches)
• Standard: 203 x 98 dpi
• Fine: 203 x 196 dpi
• Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi, 406 x 392 dpi, 203 x
392 dpi (Rx b only)
Memory
Halftone
16 MB
256 levels
Auto dialer up to 200 numbers a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C" by ITU-T No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.
b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.
Specifications_ 125
glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user's guide.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
126 _
Glossary
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
Glossary_ 127
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/
IP.
LED
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-
34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebookbased run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper.
128 _
Glossary
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers.
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Interprocess communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, textbased protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
Glossary_ 129
index
A
ADF, load
adjustment
admin setting
altitude adjustment
answering machine/fax
authentication
auto center
B
Book copy
C
checking stored document
cleaning
inside 93 outside 93 scan unit 93 transfer unit 93
Clone copy
collated
color mode
control panel
copy
erasing background 46 erasing edge 46
copy setup
130
D
DADF
cover 18 input tray 18 output tray 18 width guides 18
darkness
date & time
printing date&time in copied out 81, 83
default settings
changing the default settings 29
sound 82 supplies management 82
driver
duplex
E
email address
entering email addresses to input field
energy saver
erasing background
erasing punch hole
error correction mode
error message
extension telephone
F
fax option kit
enabling option feature after installing
fax receiving
in memory 62 secure receiving 62
fax sending
automatic resending 60 delay sending 60
fax setup
faxing
enabling the fax kit option 89, 123
FDI (Foreign Interface Device)
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)
front cover
FTP
G
general settings
Gray scan
Group
I
ID copy
imaging unit
imaging unit reorder notification
Individual
email addresses for scanning 51
J
jam
clearing paper from the duplex unit area
104 clearing paper from the exit area 104 clearing paper from the fuser unit 104
clearing paper from the multi-purpose
clearing paper from the optional tray
clearing paper from the stacker
clearing paper from the toner cartridge
clearing paper from the tray1 100
clearing the original from scanner glass
tips for avoiding paper jams 98
jam, clear
JPEG
K
keyboard
L
language
LED
Linux problems
loading originals
M
Machine Info
Machine Setup
Mailbox
deleting the data of the Mailbox 66
Mailbox Passcode 65 polling 65
printing a Mailbox 66 sending to remote Mailbox 66
Maintenance
memory DIMM
memory module
message on the display screen
Mono
multi-purpose tray
N
NetScan
network
notification
N-up copy
O
OCR
On Hook Dial
optional service
optional tray
original size
original type
originals
output options
P
paper
loading in the multi-purpose tray 37
loading in the optional tray 36 loading in the tray1 36
paper type
phonebook
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web
polling
deleting the polling document 64 polling a remote fax 64
polling from remote Mailbox 65
printing the polling document 64 storing the originals for polling 64
PostScript
Power Save
Power Saver
print quality problems, solve
print/report
configuration report 91 e-mail confirmation report 91 fax report 91
network auth. log report 90 network configuration 90
scan to server confirmation 91
Schedule jobs report 90 supplies information 90 usage page report 90
printing
problem, solve
131
problems
Q
quality
R
remote code
replacing components
replacing stapler
Report
Resolution
S
scan preset
Scan to Email
Scan to Server
scanned file format
scanner glass
scanner lid
Scanner lock switch
scanning
enabling the scan kit option 89
original size 54, 71 original type 55, 71
sending it via Network Scan Manager 52
serial number
service center registration
service contact numbers
shifting margin
side cover
SMB
sound
speed dial no.
Stacker
stand
staple cartridge
stored documents
supplies
expected imaging unit life 82, 95
expected toner cartridge life 82 management 82
Supplies Management
SyncThru Web Service
System timeout
T
telephone
terminal ID
TIFF
toner cartridge
toner reorder notification
touch screen
tray
adjusting the width and length 35
U
USB flash memory
using
W
Windows
132
contact samsung worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITE
ARGENTINE
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
BELARUS
BELGIUM
BRAZIL
CANADA
CHILE
CHINA
COLOMBIA
COSTA RICA
CZECH
REPUBLIC
DENMARK
ECUADOR
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-10-7267
EL SALVADOR
800-6225
ESTONIA
KAZAKHSTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
GUATEMALA
HONDURAS
HONG KONG
0800-333-3733
1300 362 603
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/ar www.samsung.com/au www.samsung.com/at
02 201 2418 www.samsung/ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr
(French) www.samsung.com/br 0800-124-421
4004-0000
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/ca
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/cl
400-810-5858
010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com/cn
01-8000112112
0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/latin
800-SAMSUNG
(800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
800-7267
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)
1-800-299-0013
800-7919267
3698-4698 www.samsung.com/dk www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/ee www.samsung.com/kz_ru www.samsung.com/fi www.samsung.com/fr www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/hk www.samsung.com/hk_en/
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITE
HUNGARY
INDIA
INDONESIA
ITALIA
JAMAICA
JAPAN
LATVIA
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
MALAYSIA
MEXICO
MOLDOVA
06-80-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282 www.samsung.com/hu www.samsung.com/in
0800-112-8888 www.samsung.com/id
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/it
1-800-234-7267
0120-327-527 www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/jp
8000-7267
8-800-77777
02 261 03 710
1800-88-9999
01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/lv www.samsung.com/lt www.samsung.com/lu www.samsung.com/my www.samsung.com/mx www.samsung/ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru www.samsung.com/nl NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€
0,10/min)
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)
NICARAGUA
NORWAY
00-1800-5077267
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
PANAMA
PHILIPPINES
POLAND
PORTUGAL
800-7267
1800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-8-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
02-5805777
0 801 1SAMSUNG
(172678)
022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/nz www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/no www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/ph www.samsung.com/pl www.samsung.com/pt www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/ie
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 133
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
RUSSIA
SINGAPORE
8-800-555-55-55
1800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
SLOVAKIA
0800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
SOUTH AFRICA
0860 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
SPAIN
SWEDEN
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678)
0771 726 7864
(SAMSUNG)
SWITZERLAND
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
TADJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
0800-329-999
THAILAND
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
TURKEY
U.A.E
U.K
U.S.A
UKRAINE
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
444 77 11
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726
0845 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG
(7267864)
8-800-502-0000
UZBEKISTAN
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
8-10-800-500-55-500
0-800-100-5303
1 800 588 889
WEB SITE www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/sg www.samsung.com/sk www.samsung.com/za www.samsung.com/es www.samsung.com/se www.samsung.com/ch www.samsung.com/tw www.samsung.com/th www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/tr www.samsung.com/ae www.samsung.com/uk www.samsung.com/us www.samsung/ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru www.samsung.com/kz_ru www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/vn
134 _
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
© 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows , Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
• TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
• Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV 7.00
Samsung Printer
Software section
Software section
Contents
1. Installing Printer Software in Windows
2. Basic Printing
3. Advanced Printing
1
4. Using Windows PostScript Driver
5. Using Direct Printing Utility
6. Sharing the Printer Locally
7. Scanning
2
8. Using Smart Panel
9. Using Your Printer in Linux
10. Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
3
4
1
Installing Printer
Software in Windows
This chapter includes:
• Reinstalling Printer Software
N OTE : The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows user's guide or online help.
Installing Printer Software
You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing. To install the printer software on the computer, perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on the printer in use.
A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using.
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation.
Installing Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip
this step and go to “Installing Software for Network Printing” on page 8.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.
N OTE : If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click in the upper right corner of the box to close the window, or click Cancel.
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server
2008 R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click
Next.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows
N OTE : If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the following window will appear.
• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use.
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.
6
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
N OTE : After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server
2008 R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows
4
Select Custom installation. Click Next.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use.
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.
5
Select your printer and click Next.
N OTE : If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the following window will appear.
N OTE : You can change the desired installation folder by clicking [Browse].
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.
8
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
9
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation.
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows
Installing Software for Network
Printing
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server
2008 R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click
Next.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a Network Configuration page.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
N OTE : If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, click Start → Control Panel and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
3
Click Next.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select Custom installation. Click Next.
N OTE : After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP address.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server
2008 R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a Network Configuration page.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
N OTE : If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, click Start → Control Panel and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
T IP : If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP
Address window appears. Do as follows:
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the components, the following window appears. You can also change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on the network, set the printer as the default printer, and change the port name of each printer. Click Next.
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up
this printer on a server checkbox.
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list.
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the network printer.
c. Click Next.
N OTE : After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling
10
Installing Printer Software in Windows
Reinstalling Printer Software
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.
1
Start Windows.
2
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→ your printer driver name → Maintenance.
3
Select Repair and click Next .
4
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.
N OTE : If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the following window will appear.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item individually.
• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation.
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use.
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click
Next .
If you installed the printer software for local printing and you select your printer driver name, the window asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows: a. To print a test page, select the check box and click
Next .
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish.
11
Installing Printer Software in Windows
Removing Printer Software
1
Start Windows.
2
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→ your printer driver name → Maintenance.
3
Select Remove and click Next.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually.
4
Select the components you want to remove and then click
Next.
5
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click Yes.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer.
6
After the software is removed, click Finish.
12
Installing Printer Software in Windows
2
Basic Printing
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in Windows.
This chapter includes:
Printing a Document
N OTES :
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is similar.
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see an exclamationmark or mark. An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure.
13
Basic Printing
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your application.
The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These settings include the number of copies and print range.
Make sure that your printer is selected.
3
Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down list.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer
If you see Setup, Printer, or Options in your Print window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next screen.
Click OK to close the printer properties window.
4
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose.
To create a file:
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.
2
Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click OK.
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the
Properties window for Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your
Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer Tab” on page 18).
N OTES :
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program. To make your changes
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's
Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
14
Basic Printing
Layout Tab
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes
Multiple Pages per Side, Poster Printing and Booklet
Printing. See “Printing a Document” on page 13 for more
information on accessing printer properties.
Paper Tab
Use the following options to set the basic paper handling specifications when you access the printer properties. See
“Printing a Document” on page 13 for more information on
accessing printer properties.
Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.
Paper Orientation
Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
• Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.
• Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet style.
• Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.
Portrait Landscape
Layout Options
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.
You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing.
• For details, see “Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper
• For details, see “Printing Posters” on page 20.
• For details, see “Printing Booklets” on page 20.
Double-sided Printing
Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does not have this feature.
• For details, see “Printing on Both Sides of Paper” on page 21.
15
Basic Printing
Copies
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.
You can select 1 to 999 copies.
Paper Options
Size
Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom.
When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can select it.
Source
Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.
Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:
Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.
Type
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.
Thick Paper: 24 lb to 28 lb (90~105 g/m 2 ) thick paper.
Thin Paper: 16 lb to 19 lb (60~70 g/m 2 ) thin paper.
Cotton: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m
2
25 % and Gilbert 100 %.
) cotton paper such as Gilbert
Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m
2
) cotton paper.
Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m
2
) recycled paper.
Color Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m
2
) color-backgrounded paper.
Archive Paper: If you need to keep print-out for a long period time such as archives, select this option.
First Page
This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the paper source for the first page.
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multipurpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page option. If this option does not appear, your printer does not have this feature.
Scaling Printing
Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page. You can choose from None, Reduce/
Enlarge, and Fit to Page.
• For details, see “Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document” on page 21.
• For details, see “Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper
Graphics Tab
Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.
Resolution
The Resolution options you can select may vary depending on your printer model.
The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document.
Toner Save Mode
Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. Some printers do not support this feature.
• Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the printer.
• On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page.
• Off: If you don’t need to save toner when printing a document, select this option.
16
Basic Printing
Advanced Options
You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced
Options button.
• TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.
Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document.
- Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe. This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
- Download as Bitmap: When this option is selected, the driver will download the font data as bitmap images.
Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or
Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting.
- Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting.
• Print All Text To Black: When the Print All Text To
Black option is checked, all text in your document prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.
Extras Tab
the printer properties.
Click the Extras tab to access the following feature:
17
Basic Printing
Watermark
You can create a background text image to be printed on each
page of your document. For details, see “Using Watermarks” on page 22.
Overlay
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 23.
Output Options
• Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.
- Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the last page.
- Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages from the last page to the first page.
- Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd numbered pages of the document.
- Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even numbered pages of the document.
• Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.
• Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the same way as the original, the machine places printout sets slightly offset from one another.
More Options
• Information Page: Select Information Page to print a cover sheet containing the printer name, the network user ID, job name before printing the document. When several users send a print job to the printer, this option allows you to easily find your documents in the output tray.
• Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.
This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
• Save as Form for Overlay: Select Save as Form for Overlay to save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name and the destination path each time you print. If you want to preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.
This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
Job Setting
Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD. Some printers do not support this feature.
Using Onscreen Help File
• For more information about Job Setting top right corner of the window. The
, click
Job Setting
at the
Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the Job Setting .
About Tab
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser, you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.
See “Printing a Document” on page 13 for more information
about accessing printer properties.
Printer Tab
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer configuration.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
2
Select Printers and Faxes.
3
Select your printer driver icon.
18
Basic Printing
4
Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Properties.
5
Click the Printer tab and set the options.
Using a Favorite Setting
The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab, allows you to save the current properties settings for future use.
To save a Favorites item:
1
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
3
Click Save.
When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop down list. The printer is now set to print according to the
Favorites setting you selected.
To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click
Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the list.
Using Help
Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking the Help button in the printer properties window. These help screens give detailed information about the printer features provided by the printer driver.
You can also click from the upper right corner of the window, and then click on any setting.
3
Advanced Printing
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks.
N OTE :
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is similar.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.
This chapter includes:
• Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up
• Printing on Both Sides of Paper
• Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document
• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size
1 2
3 4
Printing Multiple Pages on One
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in the Layout Type drop-down list.
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet.
5
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and type.
6
Click OK and print the document.
19
Advanced Printing
Printing Posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the
Layout Type drop-down list.
3
Configure the poster option:
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>,
Poster<3x3>, Poster<4x4> or Custom. If you select
Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages. If the option is set to Custom, you can enlarge the original from 150% to 400%.
Depending on the level of the enlargement, the page layout is automatically adjusted to Poster<2x2>,
Poster<3x3>, Poster<4x4>.
Printing Booklets
9
8
9 8
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a
2
From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the
Layout Type drop-down list.
N OTE : The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the
Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout
Type drop-down list on the Layout tab is activated.
3
Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and type.
4
Click OK and print the document.
5
After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to pasting the sheets together.
0.15 inches
0.15 inches
4
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and type.
5
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
20
Advanced Printing
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.
The options are:
• Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the printer. If this option does not appear, your printer does not have this feature.
• None
• Long Edge , which is the conventional layout used in book binding.
• Short Edge , which is the type often used with calendars.
2
2
2
3
5
▲ Long Edge
5
3
2
5
3
▲ Short Edge
3
5
• Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order. If this option does not appear, your printer does not have this feature.
N OTE : Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. “Printing a
2
From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.
3
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the binding option you want.
4
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and type.
5
Click OK and print the document.
N OTE : If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every other page of the document first. After printing the first side of your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the printing job.
A
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged
Document
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or smaller on the printed page.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the
Printing Type drop-down list.
3
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the or button.
4
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.
5
Click OK and print the document.
Fitting Your Document to a
Selected Paper Size
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Printing
Type drop-down list.
3
Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down list.
4
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.
5
Click OK and print the document.
21
Advanced Printing
Using Watermarks
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
Using an Existing Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
Click the Extras tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image.
3
Click OK and start printing.
N OTE : The preview image shows how the page will look when it is printed.
Creating a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
Click the Extras tab, and click the Edit button in the
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window appears.
3
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only.
4
Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section.
5
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.
6
When you have finished editing, click OK and start printing.
To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from the Watermark drop-down list.
22
Advanced Printing
Editing a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current
Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.
4
Click Update to save the changes.
5
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
Deleting a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
From the Extras tab, click the Edit button in the
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermarks list and click Delete.
4
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
Dear ABC
Regards
WORLD BEST
WORLD BEST
Using Overlays
What is an Overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Creating a New Page Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.
2
To save the document as an overlay, access printer
properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
3
Click the Extras tab, and click Edit button in the Overlay section.
4
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.
5
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).
6
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.
7
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
N OTE : The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
23
Advanced Printing
Using a Page Overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document:
1
Create or open the document you want to print.
2
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
3
Click the Extras tab.
4
Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down list box.
5
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the
Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and select the overlay file.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Load Overlay window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box.
6
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When
Printing. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.
7
Click OK or Yes until printing begins.
The selected overlay downloads with your print job and prints on your document.
N OTE : The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1
In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.
2
Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.
3
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay
List box.
4
Click Delete Overlay.
5
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
6
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
4
Using Windows
PostScript Driver
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD-ROM to print a document.
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the supplied software CD-ROM.
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the
Properties window for Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
N OTES :
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program. To make your changes
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's
Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
Advanced
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button.
• Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
• Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.
• Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript options or printer features.
Using Help
You can click from the upper right corner of the window, and then click on any setting.
24
Using Windows PostScript Driver
5
Using Direct Printing
Utility
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print
PDF files without having to open the files.
C AUTION
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry printing.
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.
• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer;
PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct
Printing Utility program.
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print it.
Overview Direct Printing Utility
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF format.
To installing this program, you should select Custom
installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver.
Printing
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing
Utility.
From the Direct Printing Utility window
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→ Direct Printing Utility → Direct Printing Utility.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.
2
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click Browse.
3
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.
4
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the next column.
5
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Using the shortcut icon
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.
N OTE :
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility, the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.
2
Customize the printer settings for your needs.
3
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
25
Using Direct Printing Utility
Using the right-click menu
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct
Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added.
2
Select the printer you will use.
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the below part.
4
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
6
Sharing the Printer
Locally
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer, which is called “host computer,” on the network.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
N OTES :
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.
Setting Up a Host Computer
1
Start Windows.
2
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes.
3
Double-click your printer driver icon.
4
From the Printer menu, select Sharing.
5
Check the Share this printer box.
6
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK.
Setting Up a Client Computer
1
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.
2
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search
for Computers.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of host computer account.)
4
Double-click Printers and Faxes.
5
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect.
6
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.
26
Sharing the Printer Locally
7
Scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the files, display them on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver.
This chapter includes:
• Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office
• Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software
• Scanning Using the WIA Driver
N OTES :
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-
ROM.
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.
Scanning Using Samsung
SmarThru Office
Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents from local or network scanners.
Using Samsung SmarThru Office
Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru
Office:
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other.
2
Place your photograph or page on the document glass or
DADF (or ADF).
3
Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office, you will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.
Double-click this icon.
The SmarThru Office window opens.
Tool bar
Working area
Send to bar
•Tool bar: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate the certain functions such as Scan, Search, etc.
27
Scanning
•Working area
- SmarThru Desktop: Created within the standard
Windows folder My Documents.
- Sort on Disk: Files of the folders which are not indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.
To add a folder for indexing, press Edit menu →
Preferences → Index.
It may take longer time to show the added file folders according to the computer performance and the number of added file folders.
N OTES :
• To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.
• You can use indexing and searching functions using
SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.
- Windows Folders: Allow user to navigate through all the user’s files and folders.
- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected folder.
•Send to bar: Run the corresponding application directly.
Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate application button.
- Send by E-mail: To send documents by E-mail while working within the SmarThru Office.
To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express, which has been set up with your e-mail account.
- Send by FTP: To upload a document file to server while working within the SmarThru Office.
- Send by Fax: To send documents by Local or Network fax machine while working within the SmarThru
Office.
4
Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window.
Adjust the scan settings.
N OTES :
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru
Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to open the Scan Setting window easily.
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the
SmarThru icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.
Click to start scanning.
28
Scanning
Scan Setting lets you use the following services:
•Select Scanner: Select the Local or Network scanner.
- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB port, you can store the scanned output in image or document file.
- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.
To use network scanner, your computer should install the Samsung Network Scan Manager and register the scanner within that program. Refer to Scanning chapter in user's guide.
•Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for
Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.
•Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,
File Format, OCR Language.
5
To start scanning, click Scan.
N OTE : If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel.
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office
N OTE : Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications are closed on your computer.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs.
2
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall
SmarThru Office.
3
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the statement and click OK.
4
Click Finish.
Using Onscreen Help File
For more information about SmarThru, click at the top right corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
Scanning Process with TWAINenabled Software
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use.
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other.
2
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
3
Open an application, such as Photoshop.
4
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
N OTE : You need to follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the application.
Scanning Using the WIA Driver
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software.
N OTE : The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Server
2003/Vista/7 with USB port.
29
Scanning
Windows XP/Server 2003
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select
Settings, Control Panel, and then Scanners and
Cameras.
3
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and
Camera Wizard launches.
4
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture.
5
Click Next.
6
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
Windows Vista
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound →
Scanners and Cameras.
3
Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows
Fax and Scan application is opened automatically.
N OTE : To view scanners, user can click on View scanners
and cameras.
4
Click Scan and then scan driver is opened.
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture.
6
Click Scan.
N OTE : If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on the Scanners and Cameras Wizard.
Windows 7
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound →
Devices and Printers.
3
Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in
Printers and Faxes → Start Scan. New Scan application appears.
4
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture.
5
Click Scan.
30
Scanning
8
Using Smart Panel
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s settings. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, Smart
Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software. If you are a Linux OS user, download Smart Panel from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and install.
N OTES :
• To use this program, you need:
- To check for Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer
User’s Guide.
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer
User’s Guide.
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.
Understanding Smart Panel
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears automatically, showing the error.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or
Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).
Double-click this icon in Windows.
Click this icon in Mac OS X.
Click this icon in Linux.
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select
Programs or All Programs → your printer driver name →
Smart Panel.
N OTES :
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer, first select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or
Operating System in use.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s) and various other information. You can also change settings.
1
1 Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use. Any printers do not have this feature.
Buy Now
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
Troubleshooting Guide
You can view Help to solve problems.
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your
printer. For details, See “Printer Settings” on page 14.
31
Using Smart Panel
Opening the Troubleshooting
Guide
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for error status problems.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.
Changing the Smart Panel
Program Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Options.
Select the settings you want from the Options window.
32
Using Smart Panel
9
Using Your Printer in
Linux
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.
This chapter includes:
• Installing the Unified Linux Driver
• Using the Unified Driver Configurator
• Configuring Printer Properties
Getting Started
You need to download Linux software package from the
Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) to install the printer softwares.
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail, uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR system.
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program. You don't need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.
Installing the Unified Linux
Driver
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root
in the Login field and enter the system password.
N OTE : You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the
Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.
4
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/
UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz[root@localhost root]#cd
[FilePath]/cdroot/Linux[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh
N OTE : If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen.
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
33
Using Your Printer in Linux
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root
in the Login field and enter the system password.
N OTE : You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
2
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
3
Click Uninstall.
4
Click Next.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver
Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager.
N OTE : Installing the driver in the text mode:
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver installation, you have to use the driver in the text mode.
• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./ install.sh, than follow the instruction on the terminal screen.
Then the installation completes.
• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instruction above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./ uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.
5
Click Finish.
34
Using Your Printer in Linux
Using the Unified Driver
Configurator
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I/O channel.
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver
Configurator
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver
Configurator.
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window.
Printers Configuration button
Scanners Configuration button
Ports Configuration button
Printers Configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified
Driver Configurator window.
Switches to Printer configuration.
Shows all of the installed printer.
Shows the status, model name and
URI of your printer.
You can use the following printer control buttons:
• Refresh: renews the available printers list.
• Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.
• Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.
• Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default printer.
• Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.
• Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly.
• Properties: allows you to view and change the printer
properties. For details, see page 37.
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help.
3
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the
Unified Driver Configurator.
35
Using Your Printer in Linux
Classes Tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.
Shows all of the printer classes.
Shows the status of the class and the number of printers in the class.
• Refresh : Renews the classes list.
• Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.
• Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.
Scanners Configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device properties, and scan images.
Switches to
Scanners configuration.
Shows all of the installed scanners.
Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.
• Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties
and scan a document. See page 38.
• Drivers... : Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers.
Ports Configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason.
Switches to ports configuration.
Shows all of the available ports.
Shows the port type, device connected to the port and status
• Refresh : Renews the available ports list.
• Release port : Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.
36
Using Your Printer in Linux
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2
Select your machine on the available printers list and click
Properties.
3
The Printer Properties window opens.
Printing a Document
Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application.
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the
File menu.
2
Select Print directly using lpr.
3
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the Printer list and click Properties.
Click.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•General: allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration.
•Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port in this tab.
•Driver: allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
•Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
•Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the selected class.
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer
Properties Window.
4
Change the printer and print job properties.
37
Using Your Printer in Linux
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.
•General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet.
•Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns.
•Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image position.
•Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper source, and destination.
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Printing Files
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1
Type
lpr <file_name>
from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only
lpr
and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open.
2
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list, and change the printer and print job properties.
For details about the properties window, see page 37.
3
Click OK to start printing.
Scanning a Document
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2
Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
3
Select the scanner on the list.
Click your scanner.
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected.
If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer, you can select any scanner to work at any time.
For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.
4
Click Properties.
5
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the document glass.
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.
38
Using Your Printer in Linux
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane.
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned.
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan
Area sections.
•Image Quality: allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image.
•Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about
the preset Job Type settings, see page 39.
You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking Default.
8
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.
9
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For
further details about editing an image, see page 39.
10
When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
11
Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name.
12
Click Save.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning.
To save a new Job Type setting:
1
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
2
Click Save As.
3
Enter the name for your setting.
4
Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type dropdown list.
2
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job.
To delete a Job Type setting:
1
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down list.
2
Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image.
Use these tools to edit the image.
39
Using Your Printer in Linux
You can use the following tools to edit the image:
Tools Function
Saves the image.
Cancels your last action.
Restores the action you canceled.
Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crops the selected image area.
Zooms the image out.
Zooms the image in.
Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the number of degrees from the dropdown list.
Allows you to flip the image vertically or horizontally.
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image, or to invert the image.
Shows the properties of the image.
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the onscreen help.
40
Using Your Printer in Linux
10
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the
PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.
N OTE : Some printers do not support a network interface. Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
This chapter includes:
Installing Software
The PostScript driver CD-ROM that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file to use the PS driver, Apple
LaserWriter driver, for printing on a Macintosh computer.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a
Macintosh computer.
Printer driver
Installing the printer driver
1
Connect your machine to the computer using the USB cable or the Ethernet cable.
2
Turn on your computer and the machine.
3
Insert the PostScript driver CD-ROM which came with your machine into the CD-ROM drive.
4
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh desktop.
5
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6
Double-click the MAC_Printer folder.
7
Double-click the Samsung_MFP Installer OSX icon.
8
Click Continue.
9
Click Install.
10
After the installation is finished, click Quit.
Uninstalling the printer driver
1
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
3
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh desktop.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5
Double-click the MAC_Printer folder.
6
Double-click the Samsung_MFP Installer OSX icon.
7
Select Uninstall and then click Uninstall.
8
Click Continue.
9
When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.
41
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Scan driver
Installing the Scan driver
1
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.
Turn on your computer and printer.
2
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
4
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh desktop.
5
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6
Double-click the Twain folder.
7
Double-click the Samsung ScanThru Installer icon.
8
Enter the password and click OK.
9
Click Continue.
10
Click Install.
11
Click Continue.
12
After the installation is finished, click Restart.
Uninstalling the Scan driver
1
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
3
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh desktop.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5
Double-click the Twain folder.
6
Double-click the Samsung ScanThru Installer icon.
7
Enter the password and click OK.
8
Click Continue.
9
Select Uninstall from the Installation Type and then Click
Uninstall.
10
Click Continue.
11
When the uninstallation is done, click Restart.
Setting Up the Printer
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the network cable or the USB cable.
For a Network-connected
N OTE : Some printers do not support a network interface. Before connecting your printer, make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41
to install the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder → Utilities, and Print
Setup Utility.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax.
3
Click Add on the Printer List.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “+” icon then a display window will pop up.
4
For MAC OS 10.3, select the Rendezvous tab.
•For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the
Bonjour.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the
Bonjour.
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select
SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.
5
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer
name in Model Name.
•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
printer name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer.
6
Click Add.
42
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
For a USB-connected
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41
to install the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder → Utilities, and Print
Setup Utility.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax.
3
Click Add on the Printer List.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “+” icon then a display window will pop up.
4
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.
•For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the
USB connection.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.
5
Select your printer name.
6
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer
name in Model Name.
•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model.
•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
printer name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer.
7
Click Add.
43
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Printing
N OTES :
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is similar.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-
ROM.
Printing a Document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh.
1
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document
Setup in some applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and click OK.
Make sure that your printer is selected.
Changing Printer Settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar.
N OTES : The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version.
Layout
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-down list to access the following features.
▲ Mac OS 10.4
•Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing
Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next
column.
•Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction on a page as like the examples on UI.
▲ Mac OS 10.3
4
Open the File menu and click Print.
5
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print.
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.
44
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Graphics
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting
Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic features.
Printer Features
This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and adjusting print quality. Select Printer Features from the
Presets' drop-down list to access the following features:
▲ Mac OS 10.4
• Resolution(Quality) : You can select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type.
▲ Mac OS 10.4
•Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order.
• Fit to Page : This setting allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.
▲ Mac OS 10.4
45
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the
File menu.
2
Select Layout.
Duplex Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The binding options are:
Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout used in book binding.
Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with calendars.
1
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the
File menu.
2
Select the Layout.
▲ Mac OS 10.3
3
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.
4
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select the option you want from the Border drop-down list.
5
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page.
▲ Mac OS 10.3
3
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option.
4
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
C AUTION : If you have selected duplex printing and then try to print multiple copies of a document, the printer may not print the document in the way you want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first page of the next copy will be printed on the front and back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the same page will be printed on the front and back of one sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a document and you want those copies on both sides of the paper, you must print them one at a time, as separate print jobs .
46
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Scanning
You can scan docoments using Image Capture. Macintosh OS offers Image Capture, you do not need to install other TWAINcompliant softwares.
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other.
2
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF). OR place a single document face down on the document glass.
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
N OTE : If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.
4
Set the scan options on this program.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
N OTE :
• For more information about using Image Capture, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• When scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.
47
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
S OFTWARE SECTION
I NDEX
A advanced printing, use
B booklet printing
C canceling scan
D document, print
Macintosh
Windows
double-sided printing
E
Extras properties, set
F favorites settings, use
G
Graphics properties, set
H help, use
I install printer driver
Macintosh
Windows
installing
Linux software
L
Layout properties, set
Windows
Linux driver, install
printer properties
printing
scanning
M
Macintosh driver install
printing
scanning
setting up the printer
MFP driver, install
Linux
N n-up printing
Macintosh
Windows
O orientation, print
Windows
overlay create
delete
P
Paper properties, set
paper size, set
paper source, set
Windows
paper tray, set
48 copy
paper type, set print
poster, print
PostScript driver installing
print document
fit to page
from Macintosh
from Windows
N-up
Macintosh
Windows
overlay
poster
PRN
scaling
watermark
print resolution
printer driver, install
Linux
printer properties
Linux
printer properties, set
Macintosh
Windows
printer resolution, set
Windows
printer software install
Macintosh
Windows
uninstall
Windows
printing booklets
double-sided
from Linux
R resolution printing
S scanning
Linux
SmarThru
TWAIN
WIA driver
scanning from Macintosh
setting darkness
favorites
image mode
resolution
Windows
toner save
true-type option
software install
Macintosh
Windows
reinstall
Windows
system requirements
Macintosh
uninstall
Windows
status monitor, use
T toner save, set
TWAIN, scan
U uninstall, software
Windows
uninstalling
MFP driver
Linux
W watermark create
delete
edit
WIA, scan
49
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective output.
- Print up to 55 ppm.
- Handle many different types of printable material.
- Create professional documents with Watermarks, Posters, and preprinted forms.
- Save time and money with multiple pages on one sheet, double-sided printing, and low power consumption.
- Expand your machine’s capacity with an extra memory slot, network interface, and Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3 Emulation* (PS).
- Print in various environments with Windows, Linux, Macintosh, USB interface, and network interface.
- Copy originals in several formats with booklet, erase punch holes, staple marks and newspaper background.
- Scan the originals and send it right away with E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.
- Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional).